JP2013212181A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine) or reel game machine (slot machine), the game machine increasing game entertainment by notice presentation.SOLUTION: After specific notice conditions are satisfied (e.g., when drawing a prize in a second look-ahead notice performing lottery at the stop of symbol variation), after first notice (e.g., look-ahead notice using change of icon representing suspended determination processing) is started, second notice (look-ahead notice using the movement of accessory) is started for an object to be notified which is the same as or different from an object of the first notification. The first notice is formed of a pattern from which suspended determination processing about start information in which performance of win/lose determination deriving results of win/lose determination to be notified of for the first notice is suspended, is identified. The second notice is formed of a pattern from which suspended determination processing about start information in which performance of win/lose determination for deriving the results of win/lose determination to be notified of for the second notice is suspended, is not identified.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player, such as paying out a prize ball.

  In addition, such a gaming table is provided with a symbol display device such as a 7-segment display, and when a game ball wins at the start opening, a determination is made whether or not the result of the determination is a specific result. Further, a game state advantageous to the player is generated, for example, by opening the variable prize opening for a predetermined time.

  In the game machine, the interest of the game machine is improved by increasing or decreasing the opportunities for the player to obtain the above-mentioned benefits by controlling the occurrence of a game state advantageous to the player.

  In such a game machine, there is known a game machine that produces an effect by a notice to improve the interest of the game (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).

JP 2009-254495 A Japanese Patent No. 4368929

  However, in recent game machines, it is desired to further enhance the interest of the game.

  In view of the circumstances described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can enhance the interest of the game by the effect of the advance notice.

The game machine of the present invention that solves the above-described object includes start information storage means capable of storing start information each time a predetermined storage condition is satisfied,
If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute at least the determination on the basis of the start-up information. Means,
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is established, after performing symbol variation, a symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination;
If the predetermined notice condition is satisfied, the notice object is displayed prior to the execution of the symbol variation display in which the symbol form corresponding to the result of the decision on the basis of the start information on which the execution of the decision on validity is suspended is stopped and displayed. A notice means capable of at least initiating a notice of the result of the determination of whether or not
A game machine equipped with
The predetermined notice condition includes a specific notice condition,
The notice means is the same notice object as the notice object of the first notice or the notice object of the first notice after the start of the first notice and after the specific notice condition is established. The second notice can be started for different notice objects, and
The first notice is composed of an aspect capable of specifying a hold for starting information on which execution of the success / failure determination for deriving a result of the success / failure determination subject to the advance notice of the first notice is suspended,
The second notice is composed of an aspect in which it is impossible to specify the hold for the start information for which the execution of the right / no-go determination for deriving the result of the right / no-go determination to be the target of the second notice is suspended. And

  According to the game stand of the present invention, there are cases where the interest of the game can be enhanced by the effect of the notice.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and (c) shows an example of an ordinary stop symbol. It is. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for success / failure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination. (A) is a figure which shows the special figure 2 variable time determination table, (b) is a figure which shows the character which appears in reach A, (c) is a figure which shows the character which appears in reach B. It is a figure which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the control unit 400. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process regarding special figure 2 among special figure prefetch processes. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process regarding Special Figure 1 among special figure prefetch processes. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a sub-side flag setting process at the time of a power recovery. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the sub side prefetch notice execution process at the time of a start winning prize. (A) is a figure which shows the notice notice lottery 1st table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub-control part 400, (b) is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold notice A, (c) is a hold It is a figure showing the display mode of notice B. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the first half part of the sub side notice execution process at the time of a change start. It is a figure which shows the notice alert | lottery 2nd table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub-control part 400. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the second half part of the sub side notice execution process at the time of a change start. It is a figure which shows the example in which the special figure 2 display apparatus 214 stopped and displayed the 15R special jackpot symbol in the state where the holding notice A is performed during the electric support, and then the movable object notice of the arm accessory was started. It is a figure which shows the example in which the special notice 2 display apparatus 214 stopped and displayed the 15R special jackpot symbol in the state in which the hold notice A is performed during the electric support, and then the hold notice B was started. It is a figure which shows the example in which the special figure 2 display apparatus 214 stopped and displayed the 15R special jackpot symbol in the state in which the pending | holding advance notice A is performed during electric support, and notice notification was not restarted after that. The special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the 15R special jackpot symbol while the holding notice A is being performed during the electric support, and the lottery using a table different from the second table shown in FIG. 18 during the jackpot game It is a figure which shows the example by which the alerting | reporting alert | report based on is performed. During the electric support, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the 15R special jackpot symbol in a state in which the notice notification based on the lottery using the table different from the first table shown in FIG. Then, it is a figure which shows the example by which the movable body advance notice of the arm accessory was started. It is a figure which shows the example which the movable body notice of the arm accessory started after the power failure occurred in the state where the hold notice B is being performed during the electric support, and the power was restored. The figure which shows the example of the notice notice about 15R special jackpot of special figure 1 when winning 15R special jackpot (special figure B) in special figure 2 first and winning the 15R special jackpot in special figure 1 second time is there. It is a figure which shows one or several aspect (notification | reporting aspect) prepared for several classification (prefetching classification) and every kind. It is a figure which shows the example in which the 2nd prefetch notice different from a 1st prefetch notice is started based on specific notice conditions having been satisfied during execution of the 1st prefetch notice. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which a 2nd prefetching notice is performed instead of one of those 1st prefetching notices in the state where a plurality of 1st prefetching notices are performed. It is a figure which shows the example in which the prefetch notice newly performed after the game state transfers to a big hit game state is another classification, and is performed in the aspect which the reliability fell. It is a figure which shows the example in which the prefetch notice which can identify a notice object is performed based on that predetermined conditions were satisfied during execution of the prefetch notice which cannot specify a notice object. It is a figure which shows the default aspect of the hold display prepared for every control state. It is a figure which shows the example from which the default aspect of a hold display differs for every special figure. It is a figure which shows the example by which multiple types of 2nd prefetch notices are performed in duplicate. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which a control state switches except by transfer to a big hit game state. FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a prefetch notice of a type different from the prefetch type shown in FIG. 27 is executed.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the description here, a light source that uses an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of the game, the chance button 136 that changes the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a player's balance of the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying a player's balance and card unit status are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body A224 and the effect movable body B225, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLumin S3ence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose display. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details are described later), and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is possible to hold a game up to a predetermined number (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second floating games (detailed floating game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 2, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (general) When the winning opening 226 is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Here, the ball paid out to the player as a consideration for the prize may be referred to as “prize ball”, and the ball lent out to the player may be referred to as “rental ball”. This is called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. One is arranged on the left side of the board 200. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is in a static state that matches the player side. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is a stationary state that has been rotated. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body A224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body A224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  The production movable body A224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b imitating an upper arm and a forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates 224b is provided. The effect movable body A224 is an arm accessory that moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The effect movable body B225 is also prepared in the effect device 206. The effect movable body B225 is a family crest member that moves up and down on the player side with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 3, the effect movable body B225 is above the decorative symbol display device 208 and is hidden in a position that cannot be seen by the player. Yes.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body A224, the effect movable body B225, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) may be composed of one common circuit board, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may consist of a circuit board. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random value generation circuits). 1), the main body opening sensor 1041, the front frame door sensor 1061, the door sensor with ball storage tray 1082, and the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and disturbs the result of amplification and comparison with reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a drive circuit for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 24, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the high accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, and the like. ing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  In addition, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a predetermined prize opening such as a general prize opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, a variable winning opening 234 or the like is won. And a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start port 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes drive control for the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and drive control of the arm movable effect movable body A224. A drive circuit A422 for performing, a drive circuit B423 for performing drive control of the effect movable body B225 of the family crest accessory, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body A224 and the effect movable body B225, A chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424 and the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 are connected. Yes.

  Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and awards based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the launch control unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of a special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the second special figure start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation stop display. This special figure variable stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  Here, six types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as the stop patterns of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure C” is a 2R special jackpot symbol, which is called sudden change. When these symbols (special drawings A and C) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol, which is called a sudden reduction. When the special figure B or the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and “Special figure F” is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal. When the special figure E is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. When the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. That is, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 3 is represented, and the 15th round is one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (one operation). Means to last 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in a special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit or the short time big hit is the difference in the probability of winning the big hit (special big hit or short time big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, during the big hit game, when the special figure A, special figure C, and special figure E are won, the next big hit is made. Until then, the special figure high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special figure B, special figure D, and special figure F are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game ends. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends may be referred to as a special figure probability change, and a state where the probability of winning a big jackpot after the jackpot game ends (a special figure high probability state) is a player. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  In addition, if the special drawings A to D are won, all of them shift to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state) after the big hit game ends. The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 is opened three times in the electric support state (for example, 3 to open for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until the predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be entered during a big hit and the number of game balls that can be acquired increases, resulting in an increase in gambling. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If at least any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and it may be in an electric support state (short-time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, when the special figure A and the special figure C are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained, and when special figure B and special figure D are stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter. Transition to non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (special figure E, special figure F) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, two kinds of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbol. The special figure G shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the first small hit symbol, and the special figure H is the second small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. In opening the door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. As a result, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened or closed one or more times, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. The special figure I shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the first lost symbol, and the special figure J is the second lost symbol. When the lose symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. It is also possible to prepare a missing symbol (for example, a third lost symbol, etc.) other than “Special Figure I” and “Special Figure J”. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Is included.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the hit control state of the second advantage (big hit control state and the small hit control state) where the player's advantage is high, and the second advantage A loss control state having a first advantage with a low advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 is in one of a hit control state (second control state) and a loss control state (first control state). Take control state. The transition of the control state is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 opens and closes, it is almost impossible to expect a ball to enter the variable prize opening 234. It can also be regarded as a control state (first control state).

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, symbols other than the “special symbol A” are prepared as the jackpot symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as the jackpot symbol 2.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are notifying means for informing the determination result (lottery result), and the pattern mode ( This corresponds to an example of the symbol display means for displaying the symbol variation until the special symbols A to J) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot, or “Special Figure C”, which is a 2R special jackpot, three “odd” decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination 2 ”(for example,“ decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3 ”,“ decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5 ”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. When notifying “Special Figure B” which is a 15R jackpot, “decoration pattern combination 1” (for example, “decoration 2-decoration 2—decoration 2” in which three same-numbered ornamental patterns are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. “Decoration 2”, “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying “special drawing E” that is a hidden probability change, “special drawing F” that is suddenly normal, “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” that are small hits, the symbol display area 208a. ˜208c, “decoration pattern combination 3” such as “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and “special drawing C” that is suddenly probable or “special drawing D” that is suddenly shortened is notified. In this case, “decorative symbol combination 4” such as “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, when notifying “special drawing I” and “special drawing J” that are lost, decorative symbols other than “decorative symbol combination 1” to “decorative symbol combination 4” are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination (for example, loose eye) is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of this “decorative symbol variable display” until the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol (for example, “decorative symbol combination 2”) is stopped are displayed. Sometimes referred to as symbol change stop display.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 5A) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and the stop of one decorative symbol displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern (see FIG. 10B) is larger in the design (see FIG. 10B).

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (2nd symbol mode). There are two types of stoppage display modes of the usual figure of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, which is a “common figure A” that is a winning symbol and a “normal figure B” that is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 has a special jackpot special random number counter, a small bonus special figure 1 random counter, a lost special figure 1 random number counter, and a counter for these counters in the special figure 2 Is provided. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating the special figure fluctuation time first determination random number value and the special figure fluctuation time second determination random value. Further, in the RAM 308, the number of holdings of special figure 1, special figure 1 winning random value, special figure 1 random value for big hit, special figure 1 random value for small hit, special figure 1 random value for lose, special figure 1 success / failure The determination result, the special figure 1 determination result, the special figure 1 variation time, the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the special figure 1, and the reserved number, the random number value, and the result for the special figure 2 are stored respectively. Is done. In addition, the RAM 308 has separate storage units that are divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery), separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Yes. As will be described later, the special-purpose 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure, as will be described later, One random number value for determining one variation time is set as one set, and the five random number values are stored for each area in a winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before power interruption). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, 4 for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter, the big hit special figure random value counter, the small hit special figure random value counter, and the lose special figure random value counter, respectively. Three initial value generation random number counters and three random number counters for generating the normal timer random number value, the special figure 1 variation time determination random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random numbers is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed (for example, the main value is not detected) so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (for example, 32.8 ms) and no WDT interruption occurs. Restart once every approximately 2ms, which is the control unit timer interrupt period.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice after the absence of the detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the normal figure starting port 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 234, 230 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Special-purpose timer random number, special jackpot special figure 1 random value, small bonus special figure 1 random value, lost special figure 1 random value, special figure 1 variation time determining random value, big hit special figure 2 random value, small hit The random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value, the special figure 2 random value for losing, and the random value for determining the special figure 2 variation time is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a counter for acquiring the random number value related to the special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value related to the special figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used. .

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning holes 234, 230 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, if there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of special figure 1 variable games on hold is less than a predetermined number (here 4), a predetermined storage condition Therefore, predetermined start information is acquired. That is, if the number of holdings is less than a predetermined number, special figure 1 winning random number value, big hit special figure 1 random value, small hit special figure 1 random value, lost special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variation time Get random number for decision. The special figure 1 winning random value obtained here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 variation time determining random value are derived from a software random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing generates and derives start information, and start information deriving means This corresponds to an example of (first start information deriving means, second start information deriving means). The various random number values (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of FIG. The The reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 stores the start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The first start-up information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage section and the temporary area shown in FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of holdings in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit. As for special figure 2, each random value which is starting information is acquired similarly to special figure 1, and the acquired random number value is similarly stored as a set of starting information in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. In addition, 1 is added to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 stores the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to a possible second starting information storage means. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area in FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, and the number of pending general map variable games is less than a predetermined number (here, 4), the general map winning selection at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for generating a numerical value is acquired as a general-purpose winning random number value as start information, and stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 different from that for the special figure. Further, in this winning acceptance process, a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning) of the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, or the variable winning port 234. In such a case, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the winnings of the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. ) Is set to receive winning information.

  It should be noted that, regardless of whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holds is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 in this way corresponds to an example of a variable start region control unit that performs variable start region control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal operation is not set, and no signal is sent to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232. Is not output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321, and the valve is closed in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area, set “Normal” inactive. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  Subsequently, in step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. This special figure prefetch process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225), Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first lose flag, second lose flag, probability change flag, and hourly flag. Is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure in the special figure related lottery process to be described later Based on the determination result (stop pattern mode of the special figure), the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set to represent. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is turned off during the big hit game or the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (second control state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S233) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 2341 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful from the ROM 306. Get the open / close pattern.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. When the probability variation flag is set to ON, it is in a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit after the big hit game is high (a special figure high probability state). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is not set to ON (set to OFF), it is a special figure low probability state. Therefore, the setting state of the probability variation flag affects the result of the determination of success / failure (special drawing lottery). In addition, when the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state, the electric chew is easy to open (for example, easy to hit), the opening time based on one hit is long, and the number of times of opening based on one hit is large. The variable starting area control is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. On the contrary, if the time reduction flag is set to OFF, it is in a non-electric support state, and the variable start area control is performed so as to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the setting state of the time reduction flag also affects the variable start area control. Therefore, information indicating the setting state of the probability variation flag and / or the time reduction flag corresponds to an example of game control information, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control information determination means.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special drawing 2 related lottery process), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process). As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 at the same timing. The start information is acquired and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure start port 232, the special condition 2 variable game start conditions, and the special figure 1 variable game start. Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, or if both the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable game start condition are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Figure 1 Floating game does not start to fluctuate. That is, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 performs the special figure 2 priority fluctuation, and the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 (whether or not the special figure 2 is determined) is started by the first special figure starting. This is prioritized over a lottery based on winning a prize in the mouth 230 (a determination of success / failure in FIG. 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random number value is stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum number of reservations, and the second special start area In the case where a game ball is won, the winning random number storage area stores up to the maximum number of reserved random numbers in the second random number value storage area, and both the first random number value storage area and the second random number value storage area When a random number value is stored, the random number value is stored in the first random value storage area and the random number value is stored in the second random value storage area regardless of the stored random number value. The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the second random value storage area, the random value is not stored in the first random value storage area, and the second random value storage area If a random number value is stored in the second random number The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the storage area, the random value is not stored in the second random value storage area, and the random value is stored in the first random value storage area. If there is, a go / no-go determination means for making a go / no-go determination based on the random number value stored in the first random value storage area is provided. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. Based on the determination result, the start information of FIG. 1 is used as the start information in which the determination result is not performed. In the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 of the start information of the special figure 2 remains, and the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly stored start of the special figure 2 The notification of the result of the determination based on the information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination based on the startup information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means. It should be noted that the special figure 2 related lottery process is performed first after the special figure 2 state update process of step S225, and then the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 is performed, and then the special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. It may be.

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is executed (lottery), determination of the special figure to be stopped, and determination of the variation time and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 are performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. In the special figure 2 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this determination, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. The fact that the determination result prohibition condition is satisfied corresponds to an example in which the hold condition is satisfied, and conversely, the fact that the determination condition prohibition condition is not satisfied corresponds to an example in which the symbol variation condition is satisfied. It is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is displaying special figure fluctuation or stopping, and if any one is being displayed, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process, If neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing is performed. Returning, if it is set during non-operation of the special figure, it means that the failure determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not the predetermined failure determination condition is satisfied. The determination as to whether or not the game is successful is determined by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable game held is larger than zero. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the start information stored most recently from the holding storage unit of FIG. Random values for the set (Special Figure 2 Winning Random Value, Special Bonus Figure 2 Random Value, Small Bonus Special Figure 2 Random Value, Loss Special Figure 2 Random Value, and Special Figure 2 Variation Time Random Value) The starting information (a set of random values) still stored in the holding storage unit is transferred from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values (special figure 2 winning random number value, big hit special figure 2 random value, small hit special figure 2 random value, lost special figure 2 random value, The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 variable time determining random number value corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating a high probability table for determination of success / failure, and FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating a low probability table for determination of success / failure. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag. If the probability variation flag is on, the special diagram high probability state is obtained. The numerical value range 0 to 65535) is based on which random number range in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. Or, “losing” is derived. In the special figure high probability state, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/399. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it is in the special figure low probability state. Therefore, based on which random number range in the special figure 2 winning random number value shown in FIG. Then, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” is derived as the special figure 2 determination result. In the special figure low probability state, the big hit probability is 1/299, and the small hit probability is 1/399, which is the same as the special figure high probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” corresponds to determination of success / failure.

  Next, the symbol of the special figure 2 is determined based on the special figure 2 determination result.

  FIG. 8C shows a special figure determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination table, a random number range corresponding to a stop symbol form of the special figure (see FIG. 5A) is defined for each success / failure determination result.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, if the special figure 2 determination result is a big hit, the special figure 2 random number value for big hit (taken out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308. The numerical value range to be obtained is 0 to 99), and it is determined which random number range of the jackpot the result of the success / failure determination in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are determined. Also, if the special figure 2 win / fail determination result is a small hit, the special figure 2 random number value for small hits (a possible numerical range is one of the random values for one set previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308) 0 to 99) determines which random number range of the small hits in the special figure determination table shown in (c) of FIG. G "or" Special Figure H "is determined. Furthermore, if the special figure 2 determination result is a loss, the special figure 2 random number value for lost out of one set of random values previously obtained from the storage unit of the RAM 308 (possible numerical range is 0 to 99) determines to which random number range out of the losses the decision result in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 10C belongs, and the special figure 2 determination result is “special figure I” or Determine “Special Figure J”. The special figure 2 decision result decided here is information representing the symbol form of special figure 2 to be stopped and displayed by the second special figure display device 214.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation time (special diagram 2 variation time) in the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined based on the special diagram 2 determination result.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a special figure 2 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 2 variable time determination table is composed of tables 1 to 5, and table 1 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a jackpot symbol (special figures A and B) of 15R. Yes, Table 2 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special G, H). Tables 3 to 5 are This is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (Special Figure I, J).

  In each of the tables 1 to 5, a variation time, an effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, and a random number range are defined. In this determination, the special figure 2 variable time determination random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 65535) out of one set of random values previously obtained from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 is used. The variation time is determined.

  When the special figure determination result is special figure A or special figure B (see Table 1), both are 15R jackpot symbols with electric support, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a reach effect. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, normal reach, reach A, and reach B are prepared as reach effects. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are displayed in a stopped manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is displayed. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed (reach state), that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (the symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), the predetermined jackpot symbol This is a state in which the combination (“decorative symbol combination 1” or “decorative symbol combination 2” shown in FIG. 5B) is stopped and displayed.

  Reach A and Reach B are so-called super reach types in which the effect of production is improved by adding special variation display to normal reach, and a specific character appears.

  FIG. 9B shows a character appearing at reach A, and FIG. 9C shows a character appearing at reach B.

  As will be described in detail later, in the reach state, the panda character shown in FIG. 9B appears in the middle symbol display area 208b in the reach state, and the cactus-shaped heel character shown in FIG. To appear.

  Note that long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, and the like are known as super reach, and special reach such as special multiline reach, full rotation reach, and special full rotation reach are also known. In the present specification, the term “reach” means a variation of the decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special reach. This reach is after the determination of the success / failure and the result of the determination of success / failure that the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure is successful (lottery) becomes a specific success / failure determination result (the determination result of jackpot). This is a notice effect that informs the player in advance, and whether or not to reach is determined after determining whether or not to reach. In the case of no reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively short, in the super reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively long, and in the normal reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is the time between no reach and the super reach. When the special figure 2 determination result is a 15R jackpot symbol (special figures A and B), as shown in Table 1, the longest fluctuation time of 65 seconds is most easily selected, and the fluctuation time of 15 seconds is the most. It is hard to be chosen.

  When the special figure 2 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special Drawings C to F) or a small bonus symbol (Special Drawings G and H) (see Table 2), the decorative symbol display device 208 has no reach A so-called chance all-off is performed in which the combination of the decorative symbols (decorative symbol combination 3, decorative symbol combination 4) stopped and displayed after the change of is temporarily turned off. In this case, as shown in Table 2, a variation time of 12 seconds is uniformly selected, and the decorative symbol display device 208 produces an effect that the chance eyes are completely turned off.

  When the determination result of the special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the table used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of reservations in the special figure 2. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines a table to be used with reference to the time reduction flag and the number of suspensions in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308.

  If the determination result of the special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J) and the support status is 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 1 to 3, the table 3 is used. In this case, it is in the electric support state, and in order to speed up the digestion of the special figure 2, the shortest fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is uniformly selected. Will be done.

  Table 4 is used when the determination result of special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the support status is zero, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is zero. In this case, in order to save the special figure 2 hold, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds, which is somewhat longer, is uniformly selected, and the decorative design display device 208 does not perform the reach effect.

  When the special figure 2 determination result is a losing symbol (special figure I, J) and the non-electric support state, the table 5 is used regardless of the number of holdings in the special figure 2. In the non-electric support state, if there is a prize at the second special figure starting port 232, it is a rare case that the normal figure variable game was won in the low probability state of the normal figure, In the state where the special figure 1 variable game is continuously performed, the special figure 2 variable game is interrupted and preferentially digested. In this case, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds (losing without reach) is selected with a high probability, as shown in Table 5, without shortening or extremely shortening the fluctuation time of FIG. May be selected for reach production.

  As described above, the special figure 2 variation time and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are determined, and the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) ends.

  Subsequently, special drawing 1 related lottery processing (step S231) is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is read as “special figure 1”. That is, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, one set of random values (the special figure 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 of the RAM 308) , Special figure 1 random value for losing, and random number value for determining special figure 1 variation time) are extracted, and determination of whether or not special figure 1 is executed (lottery) is performed based on one set of random values (starting information). Then, the special figure to be stopped is determined, and the variation time and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 are determined. The execution determination is performed using the determination table shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 8C is used to determine the special figure. The determination of the variation time and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 uses the variation time determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the special figure 1 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 1 variation time determination table is composed of tables 6 to 9, and the table 6 is a table used when the special figure 1 decision result is a 15R jackpot symbol (special figures A and B). The contents are the same as the contents of the table 1 shown in FIG. The table 7 is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special Drawings C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special Drawings G and H). The content is the same as the content of the table 2 shown.

  Tables 8 and 9 are tables used when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J). Even when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the table used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of holdings in the special figure 1.

  When the determination result of the special figure 1 is a losing symbol (special figures I and J), the non-electric support state and the holding number of the special figure 1 is 3, the table 8 is used. In this case, in order to speed up the digestion of the special figure 1, there is a high probability that a short variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Instead, a shortened change will be made.

  When special figure 1 decision result is losing design (special figure I, J) and non-electric support state and special figure 1 hold number is 0-2 or electric support state (the hold number is irrelevant) For this, the table 9 is used. This table 9 has the same contents as the contents of the table 5 shown in FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, since the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated with each other one by one, the other is inevitably determined if either one is determined. It will be decided. In the following description, even if it is described as the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be read as the variation time of the special figure.

  In step S233, which is performed following the special drawing 1 related lottery process in step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, and bit 15 indicates strobe information (when ON, data is set). ), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, winning round designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special command) Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and a decorative symbol display described later. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including information indicating the effect mode of the device 208, including information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., a winning effect start command and In the case of the end effect start command, information indicating the control state is included, and in the case of the winning round number designation command, information indicating the control state, the winning round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-described general command rotation start setting transmission process, information indicating a special figure stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, and a decorative symbol display device 208 to be described later are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Is set to information indicating the mode of production (corresponding to information representing the special figure fluctuation time), the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game being held, and the like.

  In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state that are stored in the RAM 308 and are output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the winning effect start command transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the winning effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the winning effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds), The jackpot game starts.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for informing the player that the big hit is to be ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). finish.

  In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation held Information indicating the number of games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance.

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7, an external output signal setting process (step S235) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step 205 are read, and the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored. When the lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame opening error or lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, Display data to be output to the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on in order to determine whether or not a power supply interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 4, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In this command processing, power recovery sub-side flag setting processing and the like are performed, and details will be described later.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In this effect control process, a start-side winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process, a change disclosure sub-side notice execution process, and a power recovery sub-side flag setting process are also performed. Each of these processes will be described later in detail.

  In step S311, when the pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S317, when there is a command to the drive circuit A422 of the arm movable effect movable body A224 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit A422, and the effect data read in S309 If there is a command to the drive circuit B 423 of the family crest effect rendering movable body B 225, this command is output to the drive circuit B 423.

  In step S319, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle. Run with.

  In step S341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like. Ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

<Special figure look-ahead processing>
Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing related to special figure 2 in special figure prefetching processing.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to the time reduction flag in the RAM 308 and determines whether or not power support is in progress (step S224a). When the time reduction flag is in the off state and the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S224i of the processing relating to FIG. 1, and when the time reduction flag is in the on state and the electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S224b. . In step S224b, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232. In this determination, the determination is made by determining whether or not the retention in the retention storage unit of the special map 2 of the RAM 308 has increased. That is, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the second special figure starting port 232 that falls within the upper limit number (four in this case) of the reserved storage of special figure 2. If it is determined in step S224b that there has been a winning (increase in the number of holdings in FIG. 2), the process proceeds to step S224c. If it is determined that there has been no winning, the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  In step S224c, first, a set of start-up information acquired in the previous winning acceptance process (step S217) is pre-read from the reserved storage unit of FIG. 2 provided in the RAM 308. That is, with the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 as a trigger, the starting information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, the newest starting information is prefetched before the determination of validity (based on the special figure 2 lottery process) based on the starting information is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this prefetching corresponds to an example of start information prefetching means. In the prefetching here, only the winning portion (holding increment) is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that pre-reading here means that the start information is read first before the validity determination (main lottery), but in the following explanation, the word pre-reading is referred to as the predecessor (result of true / false determination (main lottery)). Sometimes used to mean read.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-determination high probability table having the same contents as the contents of the success / failure determination high probability table shown in FIG. 8A and a success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. A low probability table for pre-judgment with the same content is prepared. In step S224c, the probability variation flag is referred to, and either one of the high probability table for pre-determination and the low probability table for pre-determination is selected, and the special information of the pre-read start information is selected using the selected table. FIG. 2 Based on the winning random number value, it is determined in advance whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit determination result (a specific determination result). In other words, with the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 as a trigger, it is determined in advance whether or not the winning / failing determination result based on the starting information generated based on the winning becomes the big hit determination result. Therefore, this pre-determination is executed before the determination of success / failure based on the start information (the special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this pre-determination corresponds to an example of a pre-determination unit. Here, the result determined in advance is treated as a result of prior determination in FIG.

  If the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit determination result, the process proceeds to step S224e. On the other hand, if it is not the big hit determination result, it is determined in advance using the selected table whether or not the result of the determination is the small hit determination result (step S224d). If the determination result is a small hit / fail determination result, the process proceeds to step S224f; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S224g.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prior determination table having the same contents as the special figure determination table shown in FIG. Using the special figure prior determination table, in step S224e, the big hit symbol is determined in advance based on the random number of the big hit special figure 2 in the pre-read start information. In step S224f, the special hit special figure 2 is determined. Based on the random value, the small hit symbol is determined in advance. In step S224g, the lost symbol is determined in advance on the basis of the special figure 2 random value for loss. The special figure pre-determination in steps S224e-g is also executed before the success / failure determination (special figure 2 related lottery process) based on the pre-read start information is performed, and the result of the pre-determination here is the special figure 2 pre-determination result. Be treated.

  Subsequent to steps S224e-g, step S224h is executed. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special figure 2 variable time prior determination table having the same contents as the special figure 2 variable time determination table shown in FIG. In step S224h, using this special figure 2 variable time prior determination table, the effect pattern pre-determining in the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed based on the special figure 2 variable time determining random value in the pre-read start information. . In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the preliminary determination of the production mode is inevitably performed in advance until the fluctuation time. The pre-determination of the effect mode in step S224h is also executed before the determination of whether or not the predetermination (the special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed based on the pre-read start information. Be treated.

  When the execution of step S224h is completed, the process related to special figure 2 ends, and the process proceeds to the process related to special figure 1.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing relating to special figure 1 in special figure prefetching processing.

  The process related to special figure 1 (steps S224i to S224o) is the same as the process related to special figure 2 (steps S224b to S224h), and the description thereof will be omitted. A set of starting information acquired in the previous winning acceptance process (step S217) is pre-read from the holding storage unit, and the special figure 1 pre-judgment result, the special figure 1 pre-judgment result, and the special figure 1 effect mode pre-judgment result Get.

  Special figure 1 or 2 pre-judgment pre-determined result (special figure pre-judgment pre-determined result), special figure 1 or 2 pre-determined result (special figure pre-determined result), and special figure 1 or 2 effect mode pre-determined The result (the effect mode prior determination result) is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 308 as the preliminary determination information in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the order of the hold in the predetermined upper limit number. The newly stored pre-determination information (special figure determination / pre-determination result, special figure pre-determination result, production mode pre-determination result) is pre-determined special figure 1 or special figure 2 information as a special figure hold increase command. And transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400.

  After executing the special figure prefetching process described above, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure related lottery process, and based on the same start information as the prefetched start information targeted in the special figure prefetch process, The determination result, the special figure determination result, the special figure variation time, and the production mode are obtained again.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the main control unit 300 has obtained up to the special figure advance determination result and the special figure production mode prior determination result, but the main control unit 300 does not obtain these preliminary determination results. The pre-read start information is included in the command data of the special figure hold increase command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400, as necessary, special figure pre-determination result and effect mode pre-determination result. The aspect which obtains may be sufficient. Moreover, the main control part 300 does not need to obtain a specific effect aspect as an effect mode prior determination result in step S224h or step S224o. For example, it may be determined in advance whether or not the production mode is a predetermined production mode. For example, the production mode belongs to the group of reach production per normal reach, normal reach lose, reach A, reach B, reach A, reach B, reach B, or super shortened lose, shortened lose, lose, chance of all extinction It may be determined in advance whether it belongs to the group without reach.

<Sub-flag setting process at power recovery>
Next, the power recovery sub-side flag setting process executed in the command setting process (step S307) in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of power recovery sub-side flag setting processing.

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a power recovery command has been received from the main control unit 300 (step S307a). If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S307b. A power recovery flag is prepared in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, and in step S307b, the power recovery flag is set to ON.

  When the first sub control unit 400 receives a power recovery command, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 sets effect data based on information included in the power recovery command. In this example, for example, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result) as the predetermined information related to the game control among the information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 until immediately before power interruption in the power recovery command. ), Information indicating the control state, effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to information indicating the special figure variation time), information indicating the number of special figures held, and a predetermined area of the RAM 308 The effect mode prior determination result etc. of the prior determination information are included. Based on these data, the first sub-control unit 400 returns to the effect state at the time of power interruption. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the power recovery command and returns to the control state at the time of power interruption based on the information regarding the game control included in the power recovery command. It corresponds to an example of means.

  The RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a second table usage count setting area. The second table will be described later. In step S307c following step S307b, 4 is set in the second table usage count setting area, and the power recovery sub-side flag setting process is terminated.

  Furthermore, a big hit after flag is also prepared in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, when the symbol variation stop command received from the main control unit 300 includes a special figure determination result representing the special figure A or special figure B that is a big hit of 15R, The big hit after flag is also set to ON.

<Sub-pre-reading notice execution process at start-up prize>
Next, the start winning time sub-side pre-reading notice execution process executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of the sub-side pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting winning a prize.

  The start side winning side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 15 is an effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process that is determined to have received the special figure hold increase command in the command setting process (step S307). ) Is executed. In step S3091a, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned big hit flag or power recovery flag is set on. If either flag is set on, the process proceeds to step S3091h, and both flags are off. If not, the process proceeds to step S3091b.

  The RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a pre-reading execution flag. In step S3091b, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading execution flag is set on, and if it is set on. The process proceeds to step S3091h, and if it remains off, the process proceeds to step S3091c.

  As described above, the command data of the special figure pending increase command includes the special figure success / failure preliminary determination result, the special figure preliminary determination result, and the production mode preliminary determination result as information of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance. It has been. In step S3091c, it is determined whether or not the effect mode pre-determination result included in the special figure hold increase command determined to have been received in the previous command setting process (step S307) is a predetermined effect mode. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3091h, and if it is a predetermined effect mode, the process proceeds to step S3091d. The pre-determined result of the production mode included in the special figure hold increase command is preliminarily stored in the pre-determined result storage area prepared in the RAM 408 as pre-determined information for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 for the predetermined upper limit number. Stored in order.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a notice notice lottery first table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  The predetermined production mode described here is the production mode defined in the first table shown in FIG. 16A. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, reach production (per normal reach, normal reach lose, per reach A). , Per reach B, per reach A, per reach B). The first table also shows the fluctuation time of the special figure.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, special figure 1 hold display is performed on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and special figure 2 hold display is performed on the right side thereof. These hold displays are displays corresponding to one set of start information stored in the special hold storage unit provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and the number of hold displays corresponds to the number of holds. The predetermined display mode in the hold display is a mode in which a round figure is displayed in a pattern and in one color in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a start hold display unit. Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a hold increase signal to the second sub control unit 500 in step S3091h, which will be described later. Based on the signal, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of hold displays by one. On the other hand, every time the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a hold reduction signal to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 decorates the decoration based on the hold reduction signal. The symbol display device 208 is controlled to reduce the number of pending displays by one. The hold display corresponds to an example of the start hold display, and the combination of the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the start hold number notifying unit.

  Also, in the first table shown in FIG. 16A, a random number range is defined for each of no notice, hold notice A, hold notice B, and movable body notice of the arm accessory. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the advance notification is performed based on the preliminary determination result made by the main control unit 300. This advance notice is a prefetch notice based on the start information that is read (obtained) before the start information is read (obtained) prior to reading (acquisition) at the time of determination. In other words, the advance notice (pre-read notice) may be a prior notice that is performed before the target symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol form corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not the subject is to be notified is started. Alternatively, it may be a prior notification that is started before the target symbol variation display is performed. In this case, the prior notification is continuously performed even after the target symbol variation display is started. It may be. Before the special figure related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) shown in FIG. 7 is executed, that is, before the determination is made, the result of the success / failure determination performed in the special figure related lottery process is a big hit (more limited here) Thus, it is a notification for notifying that it will be a big hit of 15R (15R special big hit or 15R big hit). “No notice” shown in FIG. 16A indicates that this notice is not executed. In addition, “holding notice A” and “holding notice B” shown in FIG. 16A are special displays in the display mode of the hold display from the above-described predetermined display mode (a mode in which a round graphic is displayed in a single pattern). This is a notice of advance notice (pre-read notice) by changing to a mode and displaying the hold display in the special display mode. The table shown in FIG. 16A is a table in which no notice / notice A is selected in all the variable times, but is not limited to this. For example, there is no notice in some variable times. May be configured so that a notice is always made. Further, the table configuration may be such that a specific advance notice is always made when a specific variation time is selected.

  FIG. 16B is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold notice A, and FIG. 16C is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold notice B.

  The display form of the hold notice A is a bad merchant character, and the display form of the hold notice B is a character of the main character.

  Also, the “movable body (arm accessory) notice” shown in FIG. 16A is a notice (pre-read notice) performed by moving the effect movable body A224 of the arm accessory shown in FIG. In addition, when this movable object advance notice is performed, the advance notice notification performed by changing the display mode of the hold display is not performed.

  In step S3091d, a lottery process using the first table shown in FIG. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 99) from the RAM 408 at the timing of executing step S3091d, and performs lottery based on the acquired dedicated random number. The lottery using the first table is a lottery triggered by winning a special figure starting port (230, 232), and a lottery of whether or not a notice notification can be executed and a plurality of kinds of notices are performed when the notice notification is performed. It becomes a lottery for selecting one type of notice mode from the modes.

  In the above description, the advance notice has been described as a notice for notifying that the result of the success / failure determination will be a big hit (more limited here, a big hit of 15R). Even if does not become a big hit, a fake notice notification is also included to make a false notice as if it was a big hit. In other words, the advance notice indicates that the result of the success / failure determination may be a big hit, is a prior notice that suggests to the player, or an advance notice that makes the player expect that the result of the success / failure determination will be a big hit. It can be said that there is. In the first table shown in FIG. 16 (a), the part that becomes a false notice of notice is shown in gray.

  As the tendency of the first table shown in FIG. 16 (a), the longer the variation time of the special figure is, the easier it is to make a notice, and the appearance rate is the highest in the hold notice A, and the movable body of the arm accessory The notice is the lowest. The first table shown in FIG. 16A is a table irrelevant to the number of holds, but the notice execution probability and the notice mode selection probability may be changed according to the number of holds.

  In step S3091e executed subsequent to step S3091d, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the notice notification in step S3091d has been won. The winning here is a lottery for whether or not the notice can be executed, and means that the player has won the notice. If unsuccessful (not notified), the process proceeds to step S3091h. If selected (notified), the number of times of notification is set (step S3091f), and the process proceeds to step S3091g. The advance notice based on the lottery using the first table shown in FIG. 16A corresponds to an example of the first advance notice. The advance notice based on the lottery using the first table is an advance notice for notifying that the result of the success / failure determination based on the predetermined start information will be a big hit of 15R. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the number of notice notifications to be executed is set in a symbol variation display unit of one special figure, and here, the same number as the number of suspensions is executed in the execution number setting area prepared in the RAM 408. Set as number of times. More specifically, in the case of the electric support state, the number of holdings in FIG. 2 is set as the number of executions, and in the case of the non-electric support state, the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is set as the number of executions.

  In step S3091g, the pre-reading execution flag prepared in the RAM 408 is set to ON. The pre-reading execution flag is a flag that determines whether or not the advance notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is executed. The state where the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON indicates the advance notice based on the lottery using the first table. This is a state in which notification is performed. In addition, based on the fact that the pre-reading execution flag is set off, the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is stopped, and in the state where the pre-reading execution flag remains off, the first table No notice based on the lottery using is performed. Next, a hold increase signal is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 (step S3091h), and the start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process ends.

<Sub-notice execution process at the start of change>
Next, the variation start sub-side notice execution process executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the first half of the change start sub-side notice execution process.

  17 is executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process determined to have received the symbol change start command in the command setting process (step S307). Is done. In step S3092a, it is determined whether or not the above power recovery flag is set to OFF. If it is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S3092c. In the state where the power recovery flag is set to ON, after the power supply is cut off, the power supply is restored to the state at the time of the power supply cutoff. The occurrence of the power recovery, that is, the reception of the power recovery command by the first sub-control unit 400 corresponds to an example of the establishment of a predetermined trigger according to the present invention.

  On the other hand, if the power recovery flag remains off, the process proceeds to step S3092b. In step S3092b, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned big hit flag is set on. If it remains off, the process proceeds to step S3092m, and if it is set on, the process proceeds to step S3092c. In the state where the big hit flag is set to ON, the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 has stopped and displayed the 15R big hit symbol (special figure A or special figure B). The special symbol display device (212, 214) has stopped and displayed the 15R jackpot symbol, that is, the first sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol variation stop command including the special symbol determination result of the 15R jackpot symbol. This corresponds to an example of the establishment of a predetermined opportunity in the present invention. Note that the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the after-hit flag may be the timing at which a winning effect start command is received. In this case, the first sub-control unit 400 issues a winning effect start command. The reception is equivalent to an example of the establishment of a predetermined trigger in the present invention.

  The symbol variation start command includes information indicating the control state (whether or not it is in the electric support state). In step S3092c, it is determined whether or not the electric support is in progress based on the information. If it is under support, the process proceeds to step S3092d, and if it is under non-electric support, the process proceeds to step S3092h. As described above, the predetermination result storage area prepared in the RAM 408 has special predetermination information as the predetermination information for the above-described predetermined upper limit number of the presentation mode predetermination results included in the special figure hold increase command received so far. 1 and FIG. 2 are stored in order of suspension. Even when the power is turned off, the power recovery command includes the effect mode preliminary determination result in the preliminary determination information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 308. The pre-decision result storage area reproduces the pre-decision result of the production mode for the suspension when the power is cut off. In step S3092d, the predetermination result storage area of the RAM 408 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined effect mode is stored in the hold of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S3092e.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a notice notice lottery second table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  The predetermined production mode here is also the reach production (per normal reach, normal reach loss, per reach A, per reach B, per reach A, per reach B) as in the above-described predetermined mode, as shown in FIG. Also in the second table, for each of the predetermined modes, random numbers ranges of no notice, hold notice A, hold notice B, and arm object movable body notice are defined.

  In step S3092e, a lottery process using the second table shown in FIG. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 also obtains a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 99) from the RAM 408, and performs lottery based on the acquired dedicated random number. The lottery using the second table is a lottery after a predetermined opportunity is established, and the lottery timing and the lottery opportunity are different from the lottery using the first table, but the lottery is the same as the lottery using the first table. In the case of performing the lottery for whether or not the notice notification can be executed and the notice notification, the lottery is for selecting one kind of notice mode from a plurality of kinds of notice forms. The advance notice based on the lottery using the second table shown in FIG. 18 corresponds to an example of the second advance notice. In the lottery using the second table, the hold notice A is not selected.

  When a predetermined opportunity is established, the notice notification that has been made based on the lottery using the first table shown in FIG. 16A is canceled, and based on the lottery using the second table shown in FIG. A notice of notice is executed instead with a predetermined probability. That is, in the case where an effect mode prior determination result representing a predetermined effect mode is stored in the preliminary determination result storage area in the RAM 408, the effect table prior determination result uses the first table shown in FIG. This is the same as the effect mode prior determination result when it is determined (step S3091c) before performing the lottery. Since the effect mode prior determination result is a result determined in advance based on the pre-read start information, the start information is the same. In other words, in the lottery using the second table, the notice mode of the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is re-determined including whether to notify the notice.

  In the lottery using the second table, compared to the lottery using the first table, the probability of winning (notifying the advance notice) whether or not the advance notice notification can be performed is low. Also in the second table, the portion that becomes a false notice of notification is shown in gray. In the lottery using the second table, the execution probability of the false notice notification is lower than that of the lottery using the first table, and the reliability that the notice notice is not a false notice notice but a true notice notice is high. high. Therefore, the interest of the player who knows these things about the game is improved at once when the notice is temporarily stopped and then notice is started. Further, in the lottery using the second table, the arm object moving body notice is selected only in the case of the winning effect mode, and the arm object moving object notice is given by a notice notice that is made after a predetermined trigger is established. Is performed, the 15R jackpot is confirmed.

  When the hold notice A is an example of the first notice notice, the hold notice B may correspond to an example of the second notice notice. Further, when the holding notice B is an example of the first notice notice, the movable body notice may also correspond to an example of the second notice notice. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the hold notice B may be executed even in advance notice based on the lottery using the first table shown in FIG. 16A, and the second table shown in FIG. 18 is used. The hold notice B may be executed even in the notice notice based on the lottery. This hold notice B can be considered to correspond to an example of the first notice notice and an example of the second notice notice. In addition, the movable body advance notice may be executed even in advance notice based on the lottery using the first table, and the movable body advance notice may also be executed in advance notice based on the lottery using the second table. The movable body notice can be considered to correspond to an example of the first notice notice and an example of the second notice notice. The notice mode of the first notice and the notice form of the second notice may be different. In this case, for example, in the lottery using the first table shown in FIG. The hold notice B and the movable object notice should not be selected.

  The second table shown in FIG. 18 is also a table unrelated to the number of holds, but the notice execution probability and the notice mode selection probability may be changed according to the number of holds.

  In step S3092f executed subsequent to step S3092e, the notice announcement lottery (notice execution feasibility lottery) in step S3092e is won (notice notice is given), and if it is elected, the sub-side notice is executed at the start of the change. It is determined whether or not the symbol variation display of the special symbol started by the symbol variation start command received by the first sub-control unit 400 that triggered the processing is the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2. The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the special figure determination result included in the received symbol variation start command is that of special figure 2, and if it is special figure 1, the process proceeds to step S3092m. If it is 2, the process proceeds to step S3092g.

  As described in the description of step S307c shown in FIG. 14, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a second table usage count setting area. The second table usage count setting area is for managing the usage count of the second table, and 4 is the upper limit value of the number of reservations in FIG. 1 and the number of reservations in FIG. It is set in step S3092r described later in the use count setting area. The maximum value of the second table usage count setting area is 4 which is the upper limit number. When a value of 1 or more is set in the second table usage count setting area, a lottery for notice notification using the second table is performed, but the use of the first table shown in FIG. The In other words, the notice notification lottery using the first table is restricted. However, after the value of the second table usage count setting area becomes zero, the notice notification lottery using the first table is performed until the predetermined trigger is established, and the notice notification using the second table is performed. No lottery will be held.

  On the other hand, step S3092h to step S3092j executed when it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed in the determination of whether or not the electric support is being performed in step S3092c, The process is the same as the process of replacing “FIG. 2” with “Special Figure 1”, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  In step S3092g, 1 is subtracted from the value in the second table usage count setting area provided in the RAM 408. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the second table usage count setting area has become 0 (step S3092k). If not 0, the process proceeds to step S3092m. If 0, the after-hit flag and the power recovery flag are set. The flag set to ON is turned off (step S3092l), and the process proceeds to step S3092m.

  As described above, the determination in step S3092f indicates that the current special figure variation game is that of special figure 1, so that step S3092g for subtracting 1 from the value in the second table usage count setting area is not executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S3092m. As described above, in the second table usage count setting area, 4 is set as the maximum value of the reserved number upper limit value of the special figure 2, and during the power support state, the second special figure start port 232 is won ( Therefore, when the winning of FIG. 1 is made, 1 is not subtracted from the value in the second table usage count setting area. Also, in the determination in step S3092j, even if the current special figure variation game is that of special figure 2, step S3092m is not executed without executing step S3092g for subtracting 1 from the value in the second table usage count setting area. However, this is also the same, and during the non-electric support state, it is assumed that the first special figure starting port 230 is won (the special figure 1 prize). Even if there is, the value in the second table use count setting area in which 4 as the upper limit value of the number of reservations in FIG. 1 is set as the maximum value is not subtracted by 1.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of the latter half of the change start sub-side notice execution process.

  In step S3092m, it is determined whether the prefetching execution flag prepared in the RAM 408 is set to ON. Here, the state in which the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON is a state in which a notice notification based on a lottery using the second table is performed. If the pre-reading execution flag remains off, the process proceeds to step S3092t. If the pre-reading execution flag is set to on, the process proceeds to step S3092n. In step S3092n, 1 is subtracted from the value of the execution count setting area prepared in the RAM 408, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the execution count setting area is 0 (step S3092o). If the value of the execution count setting area is 0, the process proceeds to step S3092p, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S3092q.

  In step S3092q, whether or not the special symbol determination result included in the symbol variation start command received by the first sub-control unit 400 that triggered the variation start sub-side notice execution processing is a jackpot symbol. If it is not a big hit symbol, the process proceeds to step S3092s. On the other hand, if it is a big hit symbol, the maximum value of 4 is set in the second table usage count setting area in step S3092r, the value of the execution count setting area is cleared to 0, and the process proceeds to step S3092p.

  In step S3092p, the pre-reading execution flag that determines whether or not to execute the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is turned off. When the special symbol determination result included in the symbol variation start command received by the first sub-control unit 400, which is the trigger for performing the sub-notice execution process at the time of variation start, is not a jackpot symbol, The pre-reading execution flag is not turned off, but if it is a big hit symbol, the pre-reading execution flag is turned off. Note that here, if the special figure determination result is a big hit symbol without distinguishing between 15R and 2R, the pre-read execution flag is turned off, but the special figure determination result is also a small hit symbol The pre-reading execution flag may be turned off. As will be described later, the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is canceled based on the off-reading execution flag in this case. Further, when the value of the execution number setting area becomes 0, the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is not performed. At the time of power recovery, since the pre-reading execution flag returns in an off state, the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is stopped.

  Next, a lottery process for normal common notice is performed (step S3092s). The normal common notice here includes, for example, an effect in which a specific character appears before the reach effect that is executed during the symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the advancement to the reach effect is announced. Equivalent to. In the lottery process for the normal common notice, a lottery process based on a predetermined dedicated random number is performed using a lottery table (not shown), and the common common notice is given according to the determination result and the effect form on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the case of execution permission and normal common notice, a lottery for selecting one kind of notice form from a plurality of kinds of notice forms is performed.

  In step S3092t executed following step S3092s, a notice related signal is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. For example, for the hold notice A or B, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 continues the hold notice A or B to the decorative symbol display device 208 when the pre-reading execution flag is set on. A notice related signal instructing to be performed is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. When the pre-reading execution flag is set to OFF in the above-described step S3092p, a notice-related signal that causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform the hold notice A or B until a predetermined timing is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. After that, the notice related signal that causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform the hold notice A or B is not transmitted. Alternatively, when the pre-reading execution flag is set to OFF in the above-described step S3092p, the notice-related signal is not transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the hold notice A or B is displayed as the decorative design from the beginning of the design change start. The display device 208 may not be performed. In this case, the hold notice A or B is canceled from the beginning of the symbol variation start. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the execution of the hold notice A or B is stopped based on the fact that the pre-reading execution flag is set to OFF.

  As for the movable body notice, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a control signal to the drive circuit A 422 shown in FIG. 4 at a predetermined timing when the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON. .

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 also holds the hold notice A or B based on the notice notice lottery using the second table that is executed when a value of 1 or more is set in the second table use count setting area. The CPU 404 transmits to the second sub-control unit 500 a notice-related signal that instructs the decorative symbol display device 208 to continue the hold notice A or B. Further, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 also performs the movable body notice based on the notice notice lottery using the second table, which is executed when a value of 1 or more is set in the second table use count setting area. Outputs a control signal to the drive circuit A422 shown in FIG. 4 at a predetermined timing.

  When the execution of step S3092t is completed, the change start sub-side notice execution process ends.

  The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 that execute the start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 15 and the variation start sub-side notice execution process shown in FIGS. 17 and 19 described above. A combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body A224 corresponds to an example of a notice means.

  As described above, the change start sub-side notice execution is executed based on the fact that the first sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol change start command for instructing the start of the specific symbol change display for stopping and displaying the 15R jackpot symbol. In the process, the number of times the second table is used is set to 4 in step S3092r of the change start sub-side notice execution process shown in FIG. 19, and the first table shown in FIG. 16A is used based on step S3092p. The first notice notification based on the lottery will be canceled. Thereafter, the big hit after flag is turned on based on the fact that the first sub control unit 400 has received the symbol variation stop command of the specific symbol variation display output from the main control unit 300. In the change start sub-side notice execution process executed after the big hit game is transmitted and then received based on the fact that the first sub control unit 400 has received the symbol change start command, the after big hit flag is set to ON. Therefore, the second notice notification based on the lottery using the second table shown in FIG. 18 is started. The canceled first notice and the newly started second notice notify that the determination of success / failure based on the same start information becomes a specific determination result.

  Further, in the power recovery sub-side flag setting process shown in FIG. 14 that is executed based on the reception of the power recovery command by the first sub control unit 400, the power recovery flag is turned on (step S307b), 2 The number of times the table is used is set to 4 (step S307c). In the change start sub-side notice execution process executed based on the reception of the symbol change start command after power recovery by the first sub-control unit 400, the power recovery flag is set to ON. The second notice notification based on the lottery using the second table is started. When the power is restored, the pre-reading execution flag is turned off to return to the first advance notice and the second advance notice newly started here is determined based on the same start information. It is a notice that the result will be a determination result.

  Next, a specific example of notice notification will be described.

  FIG. 20 shows an example in which the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the 15R special jackpot symbol in a state where the holding notice A is being performed during the electric support, and then the movable object notice of the arm accessory is started. FIG. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and in the explanation from FIG. 20 to FIG. 25 showing an example in the electric support, in order to avoid the complexity of the drawing, the suspension of the special figure 1 is held. The display is omitted, and the hold notice 220h of the special figure 2 and the hold display 220h of the special figure 2 are changed in the original display area 208d of the effect display area 208d in the decorative symbol display device 208. 220a is shown. In the hold display 220h of the special figure 2, the one shown on the left is the old hold.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20, the special figure 2 is won twice for the 15R special jackpot, but the first 15R special jackpot (FIG. 20 (f)) is not notified and the second 15R big jackpot (see FIG. 20). 20 (n)) is notified only in advance.

  FIG. 20 (a) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started from a state (not shown) having four suspensions of special figure 2, and in the state shown in FIG. 20 (a). The number of holds in FIG. 2 is three. In the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (a), two hold displays 220h of the special figure 2 are shown, and the special figure 2 hold display (third hold display based on the latest winning) is shown. ) Is changed to the hold notice A220a, and a notice is given. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 20 (a), the advance notice (hold notice A) based on the lottery using the first table shown in FIG. 16 (a) is performed. The pending notice A220a continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 unless otherwise specified in the following description, and the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is continued. It should be noted that the arm accessory effect movable body A224 used for the movable body notice is in an initial posture in which the forearm portion 224b is bent, and the movable body notice is not executed. Of the three suspensions in Special Figure 2, the second oldest suspension had a special figure 2 pre-determined result of 15R jackpot, but it shifted to the lottery of whether to perform the preliminary announcement using the first table. Is not running.

  In FIG. 7B, the special figure 2 display device 214 (not shown) performs stop display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of decorative symbol loss. In FIG. 8C, a special symbol variation game is started for the hold where the special symbol 2 pre-determined result is a 15R jackpot symbol but no notice notification is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Is started. In (d), the effect mode of reach A is started, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the middle symbol display area 208b is variably displayed. In FIG. 8E, a panda character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 8F, the special figure 2 display device 214 (not shown) displays a stop display of the 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A). Then, “decoration 7” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” which is “decoration symbol combination 2” is stopped. Here, the hold notice A220a is still displayed, and the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is continuously performed.

  In FIG. 8G, a winning effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and an opening image for informing the start of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Yes. Even during the big hit game, the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is continuously performed, and the hold notice A220a is displayed. In FIG. 11H, an end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and an end image notifying the end of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Yes. The previous notice based on the lottery using the first table, which has been continued until now, is stopped at the timing when the end image is displayed, and the hold notice A220a is switched to the hold display 220h. That is, the hold notice A220a whose hold display 220h has been changed returns to the original hold display 220h. At the end of the big hit game, the number of holds in the special figure 2 is two. In the figure (h), the hold display (hold display on the right side) 220h corresponding to the newer hold is switched from the hold notice A220a. is there. Note that the advance notice notification based on the lottery using the first table may be stopped anytime after a predetermined opportunity is established, for example, the timing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 20 (i) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 2 based on the older one of the two special figure 2 holds is started, and in the state shown in FIG. The number of holds in Special Figure 2 is one. The effect movable body A224 shown in FIG. 20 (i) changes from an initial posture in which the forearm portion 224b is bent to a posture in which the forearm portion 224b rotates downward. The posture in which the forearm portion 224b is rotated downward is a notice posture, and corresponds to the notice of the movable body (arm accessory) shown in FIG. That is, a notice notification (movable object notice) based on a lottery using the second table shown in FIG. 18 is started. Here, the advance notice by the movable body advance notice is an advance notice for the result of the success / failure determination based on the hold (the last left hold) switched from the hold notice A 220a to the hold display 220h in FIG. Note that one hold display 220h is displayed in the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 6J, the special figure 2 display device 214 (not shown) performs a stop display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of lost decorative symbols. In FIG. 10 (k), the special symbol variation game based on the hold of the last remaining special diagram 2 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 11L, the reach mode of reach B is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 11L, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the middle symbol display area 208b is in a reach state. A character “reach” is displayed to notify the user. In the same figure (m), a cactus-shaped haniwa character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in the same figure (n), it is confirmed that the determination of success / failure based on the last remaining one was won for 15R special jackpot. We are reporting. That is, in the same figure (n), the special figure 2 display device 214 (not shown) displays the special figure A as a stop, and “decoration 7” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the ornament shown in FIG. On the symbol display device 208, decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 that becomes "decorative symbol combination 2" is stopped and displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved by making different notices for the same starting information. However, the notice mode may be the same for the first notice and the second notice. However, there are cases where the interest of the game can be further improved if the first notice notice and the second notice notice are different in the notice mode.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example in which the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the 15R special jackpot symbol in a state where the holding notice A is being performed during the electric support, and then the holding notice B is started.

  Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 20 will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 21, the hold notice B is executed as a notice of notice based on the lottery using the second table shown in FIG. In the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (i), what is switched from the hold notice A220a to the hold display 220h in FIG. Has been. That is, the state shown in FIG. 21 (i) is a state in which a notice of notice (pending notice B) based on a lottery using the second table shown in FIG. 18 is started. In this example, the arm acting effect movable body A224 used for the movable body notice keeps the initial posture in which the forearm portion 224b is bent.

  In the same figure (n), the special figure 2 display device 214 (not shown) displays the stop of the lost symbol, and “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The decorative symbol display apparatus shown in FIG. In 208, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, which is a combination of the lost patterns, is stopped and displayed. Eventually, in this example, the advance notice (holding notice B) based on the lottery using the second table shown in FIG. 18 is a false notice.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the 15R special jackpot symbol in a state where the hold notice A is being performed during the electric support, and the notice notification is not resumed thereafter.

  Here, differences from the example shown in FIG. 20 will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 22, the lottery using the second table shown in FIG. For this reason, one hold display 220h is displayed in the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (i), and the effect movable body A224 maintains the initial posture in which the forearm portion 224b is bent. is there.

  However, in FIG. 9 (n), the special figure 2 display device 214 (not shown) displays the special figure A which is the 15R special big hit symbol, and “decoration 7” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (n), the decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 that becomes “decorative symbol combination 2” is stopped and displayed. As described above, even when the 15R big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the notice notification based on the lottery using the second table may not be performed. In addition, here, the hold display A, which is a notice of notice based on the lottery using the first table, is performed. However, if the figure is out of the lottery using the first table, the notice of notice is not performed. Become.

  FIG. 23 shows a table different from the second table shown in FIG. 18 during the jackpot game when the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the 15R special jackpot symbol in a state where the holding notice A is being performed during the electric support. It is a figure which shows the example in which the alerting | reporting based on the lottery using is performed.

  Here, differences from the example shown in FIG. 20 will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the notice notification lottery process in step S3092e shown in FIG. 17 is performed using a table added with the notice form of the character notice of one notification different from the second table shown in FIG. . In this example, the player is elected to perform the character notice of one announcement, and in step S3092t shown in FIG. 19, the second sub-control unit 500 is in the big hit game after the stop symbol is displayed (FIGS. 23G to 23J )) At a predetermined timing (in this case, when the 7th round is entered), a notice-related signal instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a notice of one character notification is transmitted. The one-shot notification referred to here is a notice mode that is selected only in the case of the winning effect mode and the 15R jackpot is finalized. FIG. 23 (i) is a diagram showing a state immediately after entering the seventh round in the big hit game. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A character is displayed. At the same time, the hold display B as the notice of notice based on the lottery using the first table is also continuously displayed, and two kinds of notice of notice are simultaneously performed. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 23, after starting the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table, the winner is won in the success / failure determination performed before the success / failure determination for deriving the determination result of the advance / failure target. . Then, in order to notify the winning, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot game is started (a predetermined opportunity is established). Even after the start of the jackpot game, the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is continuously performed, and after the start of the jackpot game and before the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table is stopped, The notice notification based on the lottery using the second table is started. As described above, in the effect of notifying the big hit in the hold during the big hit game, the second notice notification may be executed in a state where the first notice notice (hold notice) remains. However, even when the timing at which the first notice notification returns to the default (here, the hold display) is after the end of the jackpot game, the trigger is the derivation of the jackpot symbol.

  The one-notification character notice ends in an instant, and the notice notice based on the lottery using the first table is continued until the end effect of the jackpot game is started, and the end effect of the jackpot game is started. Then, it is canceled (see FIG. 23 (j)).

  In addition to the display on the decorative symbol display device 208, one notification may be made by sound output from the speaker 120 or lighting or blinking of light emitting means such as various lamps 418. Moreover, although one notification is instantly terminated in this example, it may be continuously performed.

  FIG. 24 shows that the special figure 2 display device 214 displays the 15R special jackpot symbol in the state in which the advance notice based on the lottery using the table different from the first table shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which stopped and displayed and the movable body notice of the arm accessory was started after that.

Here, differences from the example shown in FIG. 20 will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the lottery process of the notice notification in step S3091d shown in FIG. 15 is performed using a table added with the notice mode of the countdown notice different from the first table shown in FIG.
The countdown notice corresponds to a notice form in which the player can specify how many games ahead will be a big hit. That is, the start information is executed in such a manner that the start information that makes the correct / incorrect determination result specific can be specified.

  In this example, in step S3092t shown in FIG. 19 at the time of starting the change of the symbol for winning the countdown notice and stopping the first 15R special jackpot symbol, the countdown notice is sent to the decorative symbol display device 208 in the change. A notice-related signal to be performed is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and thereafter, a notice-related signal to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform a countdown notice is not transmitted.

  In FIG. 24A, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation variation of the decorative symbol, and the effect area 208d includes three special symbols 2 of FIG. A hold display 220h is displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a number 3 surrounded by a circle representing a countdown notice is displayed in large size. In the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (see (b) in the figure), and the symbol variation display in the special figure 2 is started again (see (c) in the same figure). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5C, the number 2 surrounded by a circle representing the countdown notice is displayed in large size. In this symbol variation display, the reach effect of reach A is performed (see (d) to (e) in the figure), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 is stopped and notified that the 15R special jackpot is won. Subsequently, on the decorative symbol display device 208, an opening image for informing the start of the jackpot game is displayed (see FIG. 5G), and the jackpot game is started. In FIG. 11H, an end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and an end image notifying the end of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Yes. During the jackpot game, the circled number (in this case, the number 1) is not displayed to indicate the countdown notice, and the predetermined trigger of stopping the jackpot symbol or starting the jackpot game has been established. The countdown notice has been cancelled. However, in such a notice form that counts down from 3 → 2 → 1 → zero for each symbol variation display, it can be easily recognized by the player that the symbol variation display corresponding to zero becomes the predetermined starting information. .

  When the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started after the big hit game is finished, as shown in FIG. 24 (i), the effect movable body A224 has the forearm part 224b downward from the initial posture where the forearm part 224b is bent. It changes to the notice posture which turned, and notice information (movable object notice of an arm accessory) based on the lottery using the 2nd table shown in Drawing 18 is started. In the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 started in FIG. 24 (i), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 24 (j)), and then the special one based on the last remaining one is held. The symbol variation display of FIG. 2 is started (see (k) in FIG. 2). The reach effect of reach A is also performed in this symbol variation display (see (l) to (m) in the figure), and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 is stopped and notified that the 15R special jackpot is won. The movable body notice started in FIG. 10 (i) is continuously performed until the symbol variation for notifying the result of the determination as to whether or not the notice is made is stopped (until (n) in the figure).

  In this example, even if the countdown notice is canceled, the player can recognize which start information he / she expects, and the second notice rather than the first notice notice already made. There are cases in which the interest of the game is improved by performing the notification.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a movable body advance notice of an arm accessory is started after a power interruption occurs in a state where the hold advance notice B is being performed during power support and power is restored.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (a), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the effect area 208d, there is one special display 2 hold display 220h, and FIG. 16 (a). A hold notice B220b as a notice of notice based on a lottery using the first table shown is displayed. During this variation display, the power is cut off (see FIG. 25 (b)), and FIG. 25 (c) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 after power is instantaneously restored. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (c), the text “Recovering” is displayed. When a predetermined trigger of power recovery is established, the continuous display of the hold notice B220b is stopped and the display returns to the hold display 220h. As shown in FIG. 6D, in the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is the decorative symbol combination 3, is stopped, Two 220h are shown.

  Subsequently, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, as shown in FIG. 25 (e), the effect movable body A224 rotates the forearm portion 224b downward from the initial posture in which the forearm portion 224b is bent. The notice notification posture (movable object notice of the arm accessory) based on the lottery using the second table shown in FIG. 18 is started. In the symbol variation display of special figure 2 started in FIG. 25 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 25 (f)), and then the special one based on the last remaining one is held. The symbol variation display in FIG. 2 is started (see FIG. 2G). In this symbol variation display, a reach effect of normal reach is performed (see (h) in the same figure), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. -The decoration 7 is stopped and displayed to notify that the 15R special jackpot has been won. The movable body notice started in FIG. 10 (e) is continuously performed until the symbol variation for notifying the result of the determination as to whether or not the notice is made is stopped (until (i) in the figure).

  In the description of the specific examples so far, the hold display of FIG. 1 is omitted, but in the description using FIG. 26, the hold display of FIG.

  FIG. 26 shows an example of a notice for the 15R special jackpot of Special Figure 1 when first winning the 15R jackpot (Special Figure B) in Special Figure 2 and winning the 15R special jackpot in Special Figure 1 the second time. FIG.

  In FIG. 26, among the effect display areas 208 d in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display of the special figure 1 is shown in the left area, and the hold display of the special figure 2 is shown in the right area.

  In FIG. 26 (a), it is in a non-electric support state, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the ornamental symbol display device 208 performs the variation display of the ornamental symbol. A hold display 218h of one special figure 1 and a hold notice A 218a as a notice notice of the special figure 1 based on the lottery using the first table shown in FIG. 16A are displayed. Note that the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is zero.

  In FIG. 26 (b), in the non-electric support state (ordinary figure low probability state), the ordinary figure variable game is won, and the second special figure starting port 232 is won once, and the special figure 2 holding number is 1. It becomes a piece. In the symbol variation display of special figure 1, the combination of decorative symbol deviation is stopped and displayed (see (c) in the same figure), and since it is a special symbol 2 priority variation machine, the symbol variation display of special diagram 2 is interrupted. Thus, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started (see FIG. 4D). In the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the reach effect of reach A is performed (see FIGS. 9E to 9F), and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 that becomes 1 "is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the 15R jackpot has been won. Subsequently, on the decorative symbol display device 208, an opening image for notifying the start of the jackpot game is displayed (see FIG. 11H), and the jackpot game is started. Even during the big hit game, the notice notification of FIG. 1 based on the lottery using the first table is continuously performed, and the hold notice A218a is displayed. During the big hit game, it is in a non-electric support state, but even during this big hit game, it won the ordinary figure variable game, won the second special figure start port 232 once, the special figure 2 hold number to one Become. In FIG. 10J, an end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and an end image notifying the end of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Yes. The notice in advance in FIG. 1 based on the lottery using the first table that has been continued until now is stopped at the timing when this end image is displayed, and the hold notice A218a is switched to the hold display 218h. At the end of the big hit game, there are two special figure 1 holds and one special figure 1 hold. When the big hit game is finished, the state shifts to the electric support state, and since it is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is also started here (see (j) in the figure). During the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, since it has shifted to the electric support state, winnings to the second special figure start port 232 are continued, and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is three. After the big hit game is over, the special support state is maintained for 100 times when the special figure variation game is played, and during the electrical support state, the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 are displayed. Is repeated, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 does not change (see (k) in the figure, for example). When the special figure variation game is played 100 times after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to the non-electric support state and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started (see (l) in the figure). The predetermined trigger is established by stopping the jackpot symbol of special figure 2 or starting the jackpot game, and in FIG. 26 (l), the effect movable body A224 is in the initial posture in which the forearm 224b is bent. The forearm portion 224b is changed to a notice posture in which the forearm portion 224b is rotated downward, and the notice notice of the special figure 1 based on the lottery using the second table shown in FIG. In the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 started in FIG. 26 (l), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (see (m) in the same figure), and then the special one based on the last remaining one is held. The symbol variation display of FIG. 1 is started (see (n) in FIG. 1). In this symbol variation display, a reach effect of normal reach is performed (see (o) in the figure), and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. -The decoration 7 is stopped and displayed to notify that the 15R special jackpot has been won. The movable body notice started in FIG. 10L is continuously performed until the symbol variation for notifying the result of the determination as to whether the object is noticed is stopped and displayed (until FIG. 10P).

  In this way, during the normal state (during the non-big hit game in the non-electric support state), the first notice notification is made in FIG. 1, a big hit is made before the hold is consumed, and then in the electric support state. After the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is digested the specified number of times (100 times), the normal state may be returned to the second notice in the special figure 1. Although a considerable number of symbol variation displays are straddled on the way, it is possible to achieve the same effect as other examples in that different notices are given to the same starting information.

  In each of the specific examples described above, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by making different notices for the same starting information. However, the notice mode may be the same for the first notice and the second notice. However, there are cases where the interest of the game can be further improved if the first notice notice and the second notice notice are different in the notice mode. In addition, even if the first notice is canceled, the player may be able to recognize which start information is expected, rather than performing the first notice already made. There are cases in which the interest of the game is improved by performing the second notice.

  In the description so far, the example of the notice of notification using the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body A 224 has been described. Notification may be performed.

  Further, both the first notice and the second notice may be a hold notice that is a change in hold. That is, if the change mode of the hold change is different, the configuration of the second notice notification different from the first notice notice is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable that the second notice notification provides a holding notice with a high degree of reliability in comparison with the first notice information. In other words, since it is a warning notification performed for the same start information, it is desired that the second warning notification that appears later can be expected.

  Further, after the big hit game or at the time of power recovery, the notice mode is selected from the second table four times uniformly. That is, the notice mode is selected from the second table regardless of whether or not the first notice has been given before the big hit game or before the power is turned off. In this way, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the first notice has been given before the big hit game or before the power is turned off.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, it is assumed that the symbol variation shown in FIG. 2 is performed during the electric support state, and the symbol variation shown in FIG. 1 is assumed in the non-electric support state. . Since the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is the priority variation machine of the special figure 2, even if the first special figure start port 230 wins in the electric support state, the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 2 is given priority. Is called. Therefore, a notice of advance is made for the fact that the result of the determination in FIG. 2 becomes the specific result of the determination during the electric support state, and the result of the determination in FIG. 1 is determined as the result of the specific determination in the non-electric support state. A notice is given to become a target. For this reason, the selection period of the second table after establishment of a predetermined opportunity is set to a period in which the symbol variation display is performed four times (a period of 4 games). Only special figure 1 is counted (steps S3092f and S3092j). As described above, the notice notification is made the same as the state of the special figure that can be executed, and if it is counted up to four times, the first notice notice was given before the big hit game or before the power was cut off (holding and storing). You can follow all pending).

  Note that the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above has two types of special drawings, but may have one type of special drawing. In this case, in the above description, “special drawing 2” is simply read as “special drawing”, and the same processing as the processing related to special drawing 2 is performed. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the special figure 2 priority change machine has been described as an example, but a winning order change machine or a simultaneous change machine may be used. Further, the process related to the special figure 1 may be performed in the same manner as the process related to the special figure 2. Furthermore, in the case of fluctuation in winning order, it must be assumed that the symbol variation of Special Figure 1 is performed even during the electric support state, and the symbol variation of Special Figure 2 is performed even during the non-electric support state. Therefore, the maximum value of the number of times the second table is used may be the total number of the reserved number in FIG. 1 and the reserved number in FIG.

  Subsequently, an embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the following description, the description overlapping with what has been described so far is omitted, and components having the same names as those of the components described so far are denoted by the same reference numerals as those used so far. explain.

  In the present embodiment, before the start information is acquired in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) shown in FIG. 7, the special figures shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. A plurality of types (pre-reading types) are prepared in the pre-reading notice, in which the result of the success / failure determination based on the start-up information pre-read in the pre-reading process is targeted, and one or more modes (notification modes) are provided for each type. Is also available.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a plurality of types (prefetching types) and one or a plurality of modes (notification modes) prepared for each type.

  In the present embodiment, five types of prefetching types are prepared. As the prefetch type here, the hold icon change for performing a notice by changing the display mode of the hold display from the default display mode (a mode in which a round graphic is displayed in a single pattern), and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 Background change (subjugation mode) in which a notice is made by changing the image, an accessory action in which an advancement is performed by operating the arm accessory production movable body A224, and a family crest effect production is movable that there is a big hit in the hold Countdown for giving a notice by notifying the timing to start the target symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol form corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not the subject is to be notified, and the on-hold consecutive resort notification that performs the advance notice by operating the body B225 Is prepared. In the pre-reading notice by the hold icon change, the background change, and the countdown, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the pre-reading means or the notice means. Further, in the pre-reading notice by the action of the accessory, the arm object effect movable body A224 corresponds to an example of the pre-reading means or the notice means. It corresponds to an example of means or notice means.

  The execution trigger of each prefetch type is when the special icon start opening is entered when the hold icon changes (when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the hold increase command), and when the background change changes, when the special symbol starts to change (first 1 sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol variation start command), and in the accessory operation, it is at the time of special symbol variation stop (when the first sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol variation stop command), and is suspended In the Urenrenso notice, it is at the start of a predetermined land (7 rounds here) that is a big hit (when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a predetermined (seventh) big prize opening command), and in the countdown a special figure At the start of symbol variation (when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command). In addition, the timing at which the target symbol variation display is performed, that is, the start information on which the execution of the correct / invalid determination for deriving the result of the correct / inappropriate determination subject to the advance notice is suspended (in short, start information for the advance notice) There are two types of prefetching notices that can be specified: change of the hold icon and countdown, and the remaining types of prefetching notices cannot be specified. Although the target of the pre-reading notice is only the result of the determination of success / failure, in the following description, for the sake of convenience, the symbol variation display (target symbol variation display) that stops and displays the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure is referred to as the subject of the announcement. In some cases, the start information used when deriving the result of the determination is referred to as a subject of notice, or the holding of a special figure is referred to as a subject of notice. In addition, you may perform a pending | reserved consecutive resort notification every time a round is started, ie, whenever the 1st sub control part 400 receives a big prize opening command.

  Moreover, the alerting | reporting aspect prepared for every kind represents the reliability. The reliability here is the reliability that the prefetching notice is not a false prefetching notice but a true prefetching notice. In other words, in a degree (%) indicating how correct the result of the success / failure determination is to be a specific success / failure determination result (here, 15R big hit (Special Figure A or Special Figure B shown in FIG. 5A)). Yes (hereinafter the same). The reliability can be obtained by jackpot probability × selection rate of display mode / (big hit probability × display mode selection rate + losing probability × display mode selection rate). The notice mode of the bad merchant in the change of the hold icon is the same as the display form of the hold notice A described above, but here, the pre-read notice with a reliability of 3% is used. Although it is the same as the display mode of B, here it is a pre-reading notice with a reliability of 30%. On the other hand, the display mode of the family crest is a pre-reading notice with a reliability of 100%. In addition, in the on-hold consecutive resort notice, only a mode with a reliability of 100% is prepared, and in the countdown, four modes are prepared. In any mode, the reliability is 100%. The remaining “1” in the countdown means that the target symbol variation display is started with the next symbol variation display.

  Further, whether or not each prefetch notice is executed is determined by lottery (prefetch notice execution lottery) using a dedicated random number in the first sub-control unit 400. The lottery here is performed at a timing according to the execution trigger. Therefore, for the same pre-read starting information, each pre-reading notice lottery is performed at the time of special symbol winning, at the start of special symbol variation, and at the time of symbol variation stop. The notification mode corresponding to the reliability is also determined by lottery (notification mode lottery) using a dedicated random number in the first sub-control unit 400. The pre-reading notice execution lottery and the notification mode lottery can be performed by one lottery. In the notification mode lottery, the selection probabilities are set to be different depending on the prefetching result transmitted from the main control unit 300. For example, when the prefetching result is a big hit, a high-reliability notification mode is set. When it is easy to select and the prefetching result is lost, it is easy to select a notification mode with low reliability. Note that the pre-reading notice lottery or the notification mode lottery may be performed at the time of special figure winning. In this case, the start of the pre-reading notice is delayed except for the change of the hold icon. It will be. In addition, the pre-reading advance notice lottery may be performed at the time of special figure winning, and the notification mode lottery in the case of winning may be performed at a timing according to the execution opportunity.

  Note that, in a state in which the countdown prefetching notice is being executed, the priority order may be determined between the types so that the background change prefetching notice is not performed.

  Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a second prefetch notice different from the first prefetch notice is started based on the establishment of a specific notice condition during execution of the first prefetch notice. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 28, the change of the hold icon corresponds to the first prefetch notice, and the on-hold consecutive resort notification and the accessory action correspond to the second prefetch notice.

  The pachinko machine 100 in this example is also a special figure 2 priority change machine, and in the example shown in FIG. 28, the control state is non-electric support. Here, in order to avoid the complexity of the drawing, the hold display of the special figure 2 is omitted, and only the hold display of the special figure 1 is shown. In the hold display in FIG. 1, the one shown on the left becomes the old hold.

  FIG. 28 (a) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of FIG. 1 is started from a state (not shown) where there are four suspensions of FIG. 1, and in the state shown in FIG. 28 (a). The number of holds in FIG. 1 is three. In the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (a), one default hold display 220h shown in FIG. (Second hold display) is changed to hold notice 220a, which is a bad merchant's notification mode, and the special figure 1 hold display (third hold display) based on the newest third prize is It is changed to the hold notice 220b which is an aspect, and a plurality of pre-read notices are performed for different start information. In the following description, the oldest hold display is referred to as first hold, the next old hold display is referred to as second hold, the third oldest hold display is referred to as third hold, and the newest hold display is referred to as fourth hold. Sometimes referred to as hold.

  In FIG. 5B, the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) performs stop display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of decorative symbol loss. In FIG. 5C, the special symbol variation game for the first suspension indicated by the default suspension display 220h is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. In (d), the effect mode of reach A is started, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the middle symbol display area 208b is variably displayed. In FIG. 8E, a panda character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 8F, the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) displays a stop display of the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A). Then, “decoration 7” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” which is “decoration symbol combination 2” is stopped. Again, the two hold notices 220a and 220b are still displayed, and the first prefetch notice is continuously performed.

  In FIG. 5G, a winning effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the decorative image display device 208 shown in FIG. Character display image) is displayed. Even during the big hit game, the two hold notices 220a and 220b of the first hold and the second hold are displayed, and the first prefetch notice is continuously performed. In FIG. 9H, the first round is started, and there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230. The hold icon change based on the winning here is not performed, and a default hold display 220h is added. That is, the third hold is displayed by the default hold display 220h. Thereafter, the 6th land is digested, and during this time, the two hold notices 220a and 220b are displayed, and the first prefetch notice is continuously performed. In addition, there is an additional one ball at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold is full. That is, the fourth hold (fourth hold) is accumulated. The hold icon is not changed for the fourth hold, and a default hold display is added. Note that the hold icon may be changed even during the big hit game.

  In FIG. 5I, the seventh round is started. At the start of the seventh round, the in-hold-in-resort notification, which is the second look-ahead notice, is started, and the family crest effect production movable body B225 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 from the upper part of the decorative design display device 208. It descends to the front of the screen. As shown in FIG. 27, the reliability of the pre-reading notice by the family crest effect production movable body B225 is 100%, which is higher than the reliability of the two pending notices 220a and 220b that have been continued so far. That is, the second prefetching notice here corresponds to a notice having higher reliability than the first prefetching notice. Further, the image of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes in accordance with the descending family crest effect moving movable body B225, and the two hold notices 220a and 220b that have been continued until now become invisible or difficult to see. Yes. That is, the execution of the first prefetching notice is stopped by the start of the second prefetching notice. In the present specification, the cancellation of the advance notice or the stop of the prefetch notice means that the design change display for stopping and displaying the design form corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure that is the subject of the prefetch notice is started or the design form thereof. Means that the pre-reading notice is not performed at the time when the pre-reading notice is to be performed until the display is stopped, and includes the meaning of termination. In this way, since the reliability of the jackpot reliability of the second pre-reading notice performed after the first pre-reading notice is high, the player's expectation has decreased due to the execution of the first pre-reading notice. Even in such a case, it is possible to raise the expectation by executing the second look-ahead notice later, and to further raise the player's expectation due to the large increase in the reliability. In addition, by canceling the first look-ahead notice, it may be possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively on the symbol variation display performed based on the target start information. In addition, even if the reliability of the first prefetch notice is low and it is difficult to expect, the second change will be made instead of the first prefetch notice before the symbol variation display based on the start information subject to the notice is performed. By performing the pre-reading notice, there may be a case where a sense of expectation for one start information can be maintained for a long time. In addition, since the second pre-reading notice that is a big hit decision is performed instead of the first pre-reading notice that does not know whether it is a big hit or a loss, there may be a case where it is possible to further reduce the uncomfortable feeling caused to the player by changing the notice type. . In addition, the establishment of the execution condition of the second look-ahead notice (specific notice condition) is not disadvantageous for the player here, but even if it is disadvantageous, Since it can be seen that the display is a big hit in the variation display based on the start information subject to the pre-reading notice, it is difficult for the player to be dissatisfied.

  The on-hold consecutive resort notification is ended when the player enters the eighth round, and the on-hold display is restored on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as described above, since the execution of the first prefetch notice is stopped by the start of the second prefetch notice, the hold display of the second hold and the third hold is displayed in the default display mode. That is, all the hold displays from the first hold to the fourth hold are displayed in the default display mode. Note that the second hold and the third hold may be displayed in the display form of the hold notices 220a and 220b again when the on-hold consecutive resort notification ends.

  In FIG. 6J, an end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The end image of “Decoration 7” is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 includes a default hold display 220h indicating the first hold and the second hold, which are held before the start of the big hit game, and the third hold and the fourth hold held during the big hit game. A default hold display 220h representing each is displayed.

  When the big hit game is finished, as shown in FIG. 10 (k), the symbol variation display based on the first hold is started.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 29 (a), the symbol variation display started in FIG. 28 (k) is terminated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of decorative symbol loss. At the timing when the symbol variation ends, another accessory action, which is another second pre-reading notice, is started, and the arm accessory production movable body A224 starts to move. The movement of the arm accessory here is “medium”, and after the forearm portion 224b is turned from the initial posture in which the forearm portion 224b is bent to the warning posture in which the forearm portion 224b rotates downward as indicated by the dotted line, the forearm portion 224b Ascend to the middle position. Whether it is a look-ahead notice with this arm accessory or a look-ahead notice with a family crest, it is a look-ahead notice that cannot be specified, but the change in the hold icon of the first look-ahead notice can specify the notice object It is a pre-reading notice. In this way, after the first pre-reading notice that can identify the target start information is performed, for the second pre-read notice that is newly performed, by performing the target start information in an unidentifiable manner, Improve the excitement of the game stand by allowing the player to guess whether the second prefetch notice is the same as the first prefetch notice or a new prefetch notice based on other start-up information May be possible. In particular, by obfuscating the subject of the second prefetch notice to be performed later, for example, when the reliability in the second prefetch notice is higher than the first prefetch notice being executed, Even if the start information subject to the prefetch notice is different from the start information subject to the first prefetch notice, the expectation may be maintained or increased. In addition, there may be a case where a sense of expectation for the start information for which the first prefetch notice is not performed can be restored.

  Here, the pre-reading notice by the family crest character shown in FIG. 11 (i) is the same as the notice of holding notice 220b, which is the notification form of Tono-sama shown in FIG. The pre-reading notice by the arm accessory shown in k) may be shared with the holding notice 220b, which is a notification form of Tono-sama. In other words, any prefetching notice may be a prefetching notice that makes the second hold in the stage of FIG. By doing so, there is a case where the interest of the game can be enhanced by the effect by the pre-reading notice. Further, since the type and mode of the second prefetch notice is different from the first prefetch notice, it may be possible to easily inform the player that the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied. Further, by executing a plurality of pre-reading notices each having a different type and a different aspect with respect to a single determination result, the player is attracting attention to the symbol variation display performed based on the starting information. In some cases, the player's attention may be gathered with respect to other symbol variation displays in which the pre-reading notice is continued.

  In addition, the first look-ahead notice by the change of the hold icon with the execution trigger when the special prize is won is the second look-ahead by the notification of the in-hold extended resort with the execution trigger at the start of the predetermined land (7 rounds in this case). It is started before the notice, but it is lost in the pre-reading notice execution lottery by the change of the hold icon at the time of special figure winning, and it is in the pre-reading notice execution lottery by the notice of the reserved house in the reservation at the start of the predetermined land (7 rounds here) You may win. In this case, before the first pre-reading notice due to the change of the hold icon is started, the execution of the second pre-reading notice by the notification of the reservation in the on-hold villa with the reliability of 100% is started as the pre-reading notice. become. By doing so, a second pre-reading notice with a higher jackpot reliability than the first pre-reading notice is performed, and the player may be noticed by the symbol variation display based on the target start information. Further, when it can be assumed that the gaming state has shifted to an advantageous state for the player based on the establishment of the execution condition (specific notice condition) of the second look-ahead notice, that is, the actual advantageous state. There is a case where it can be misunderstood even if it is not shifted, and a player's willingness to play may be improved.

  On the other hand, the second prefetch notice may be different from the first prefetch notice and the notice subject. That is, the pre-reading notice by the family crest character shown in FIG. 11 (i) may be a pre-reading notice held for the third hold or the fourth hold, which is held during the big hit game. The same applies to the pre-reading notice by the arm accessory shown in FIG. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice by the family crest character shown in FIG. 10 (i) is the same as the notice object of the holding notice 220b which is the notification mode of Tono-sama, and the pre-reading notice by the arm character shown in FIG. It may be a pre-reading notice that is reserved for the third hold or the fourth hold. Even in this way, there is a case where the interest of the game can be enhanced by the effect of the pre-reading notice. In addition, it is easy for the player to be notified that the execution condition (specific notice condition) of the second prefetch notice is established. Furthermore, it is easy to understand that the second prefetching notice based on the start information (second start information) held during the big hit game is newly performed. In addition, the second look-ahead notice based on the second start information is executed instead of the first look-ahead notice based on the first start information, thereby improving the fun of the game stand without confusing the player. There are cases where it is possible. In some cases, the player can be focused only on the second prefetch notice. Furthermore, there is a case where the uncomfortable feeling caused by the cancellation of the first prefetch notice can be alleviated by starting the second prefetch notice.

  In addition, the pre-reading notice by the family crest character shown in FIG. 10 (i) is a pre-reading notice held for the third hold or the fourth hold, which is held during the big hit game, and the arm shown in FIG. The pre-reading advance notice by an accessory may be a pre-reading advance notice in common with the hold notice 220b, which is a notification form of Tono-sama. In this case, the pre-reading notice by the family crest character corresponds to the second pre-reading notice. For example, when the third hold based on the first round entry is set as the second pre-reading notice, The lottery for whether or not to perform the advance notice is performed at the time of entering the first round. Winning this execution availability lottery establishes the second prefetch notice condition. Here, while the first prefetching notice and the notice object are made common, the conditions for restoring the prefetching notice of different types are set at the same time. In this example, the accessory action whose execution trigger is when the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped corresponds to an example of a third prefetch notice in which the first prefetch notice has been restored. Note that the third prefetch notice may be of the same type as the first prefetch notice, but may have a different mode. When the type and mode are the same as those of the first prefetching notice, the first prefetching notice is restored as it is. Thus, instead of the first look-ahead notice based on the second hold start information (first start information), the second look ahead based on the start information (second start information) held during the big hit game By executing the third prefetching advance notice based on the first start information while executing the advance notice, it is easier to understand that the execution condition (specific notice condition) of the second prefetch notice is established. In addition, based on the fact that a specific notice condition is established, a prefetch notice of a different type is executed as a look-ahead notice based on the same starting information, so that the prefetch notice before the establishment of the specific notice condition is given to the player. Even if it cannot be expected, there is a possibility that it will be changed to contents that can be expected according to the establishment of the specific notice condition. Sometimes it can be noticed.

  Note that the pre-reading notice lottery or the notification mode lottery may be performed at the time of special figure winning. In this case, the start of the pre-reading notice is delayed except for the change of the hold icon. It will be. In addition, the pre-reading advance notice lottery may be performed at the time of special figure winning, and the notification mode lottery in the case of winning may be performed at a timing according to the execution opportunity.

  In FIG. 29 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold display 220h that was displayed in the notification manner of Tono-sama at the stage of FIG. 28 (h) is started. In FIG. A pre-reading notice of the action of the accessory by A224 is performed again. Here, the movement of the arm accessory is “large”, and the forearm portion 224b is raised to the “large” position. The notice object of the pre-reading notice here is different from the notice object of the first pre-reading notice, and the third hold (FIG. 29 (FIG. 29 ()) held during the jackpot game shown in FIGS. c) corresponds to the first hold), or the fourth hold (corresponding to the second hold in FIG. 29C) corresponds to the pre-reading notice.

  In FIG. 29D, the symbol variation display based on the hold that was the first hold at the stage of FIG. 29C is started, and in FIG. 29E, the effect mode of reach B is started, and the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, in each of the right symbol display areas 208c, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol display area 208b is variably displayed. In FIG. 8 (f), a cactus-shaped haniwa character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b. Stop display is performed, "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", which is "decoration symbol combination 2," is stopped. Accordingly, the pre-reading advance notice of the accessory action by the arm accessory effect movable body A 224 in FIG. 29C is the third hold (FIG. 28) held during the big hit game shown in FIGS. 29 (c) corresponds to the first hold), which is a pre-reading notice.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the second prefetching notice is executed in place of one of the first prefetching notices in a state where a plurality of first prefetching notices are being executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 30, the hold icon change corresponds to the first prefetch notice, and the background change corresponds to the second prefetch notice.

  FIG. 30 (a) shows a state in which the symbol variation display in FIG. 1 is started from a state (not shown) in which there are four suspensions in FIG. 1, and in the state shown in FIG. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is three. In the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (a), the special figure 1 hold display of the first hold is changed to a hold notice 220a that is a notification form of the bad merchant, and the special display of the third hold is displayed. The hold display in FIG. 1 is changed to a hold notice 220c, which is a family crest notification mode with a reliability of 100%. As described above, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being concentrated on one first prefetching notice while improving the interest of the game stand by executing a plurality of first prefetching notices. is there. Note that the second reserved special map 1 hold display 220h is displayed in a default notification mode.

  In FIG. 30B, a reach effect is developed in the middle of the symbol variation display started in FIG. 30A. In FIG. 30C, the 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A) is displayed on the decorative symbol table device 208. "Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed in a stopped state.

  In FIG. 4D, the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state and the first round is started. Even when the first round is started, the first hold notice 220a and the third hold notice 220c are displayed, and the first prefetch notice is continued.

  In FIG. 8E, an end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 4E notifies the end of the big hit game “decoration 7-decoration 7”. The end image of “Decoration 7” is displayed. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the third hold notice 220c is displayed, but the first hold notice 220a is canceled and the first hold is switched to the default hold display 220h. Instead, a second pre-reading notice due to a background change is started as a pre-reading notice with the first hold as the notice target. Here, the background on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the display mode of white subjugation. In this way, the player may be able to draw attention to the first pre-reading notice of the third hold that is continuously performed without being canceled, or the first pre-read of the first hold that has been canceled. In some cases, the expectation recalled by the notice can be reset once. In addition, the second look-ahead notice will take over the player's expectation for the first look-ahead notice of the suspended first hold while paying attention to the player in the continuing first look-ahead notice of the third hold. It may be possible to reduce the sense of incongruity. Further, a plurality of pre-reading notices are performed for the same starting information, and the target starting information is specified by the pre-reading notice made earlier, while the target starting information is made unspecified for the pre-reading notice made later. As a result, the second advance notice can be performed even if the number of pieces of start information stored in the start storage means does not change before and after the execution condition (specific notice condition) of the second prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, even if there is only one hold, the first prefetch notice and the second prefetch notice can be executed, and there may be a case where a prefetch notice effective for a player who is not particularly concerned about the number of holds is possible.

  The second prefetching notice (prefetching notice due to background change) is started at the same time as the first prefetching notice (holding notice 220a) and the same notice object (first hold) as the first prefetching notice. For example, the length of the period for maintaining the expectation generated by the pre-reading notice (from the start of the pre-reading notice to the start of symbol variation based on the start information subject to the notice) is set to the length of the first pre-reading notice and the second pre-reading notice. In some cases, the player does not feel uncomfortable and does not reduce the game motivation.

  In the description using FIG. 27, the execution trigger of the background change prefetch notice has been described when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command. However, in this example, since the suspension remains, the big hit When the game is over, the symbol variation display is started immediately. For this reason, without waiting for the symbol variation start command, the background change pre-reading notice is started when the end effect start command is received. In this example, instead of the hold notice 220a that can specify the target hold, a pre-reading notice of the background change that cannot specify the target hold is started. The pre-reading notice of the background change started here ends when the symbol variation starts. In this example, the third pending reservation notice 220c is continued, but the third reserved notice 220c may also be canceled to cancel the entire first prefetch notice.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the pre-reading notice newly performed after the game state transitions to the big hit gaming state is performed in a different type and in a manner in which the reliability is lowered.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31, the hold icon change corresponds to the first prefetch notice, and the background change corresponds to the second prefetch notice.

  FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of FIG. 1 is started from a state (not shown) where there are four suspensions of FIG. 1, and in the state shown in FIG. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is three. In the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (a), the special figure 1 hold display of the third hold is changed to a hold notice 220b which is a notification form of Tonama with a reliability of 30%. The first look-ahead notice is made. In addition, the special figure 1 hold display 220h of the first hold and the second hold is displayed in a default notification mode.

  In FIG. 5B, the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) performs stop display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of decorative symbol loss. In FIG. 5C, the symbol variation display for the first hold indicated by the default hold display 220h is started. In the symbol variation display started in the same figure (c), as shown in the same figure (d) to (e), it has been developed into a reach effect, and no pre-reading notice has been given for this symbol variation display. However, as shown in FIG. 5F, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the 15R special big hit symbol (special illustration A) is stopped and displayed on the ornament symbol table device 208. At this stage, the number of reserved figures in Fig. 1 is two.

  As shown in FIG. 6G, after the opening image (“big hit” character display image) for notifying the start of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. The first round is started. Until the opening image is displayed, the first look-ahead notice by the hold notice is continued, but in this example, the first look-ahead notice is canceled at the timing when the first round is started. The first look-ahead notice does not have to restore (resume) the display as shown in FIG. 6 (j), and restore (resume) the display when a predetermined condition is satisfied. May be. Further, as shown in FIG. 6J, the information may be displayed together with the second prefetching notice executed in place of the first prefetching notice. From the start of the first round to the end of the fifteenth round through the seventh round as shown in FIG. 5 (i) and immediately before the end presentation start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, There is a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is accumulated up to four full. That is, during the big hit game, the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from two to four. An end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and an end image of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the end of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 at this timing, the hold display has been restored, but any hold display 220h is displayed in the default display mode, and no pre-reading notice is given by the hold notice. That is, the second hold notice 220b is switched to the default hold display 220h. Instead, here again, as in the example shown in FIG. 30, the background on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the display mode of white subjugation as the second prefetching notice, and the prefetching notice of the background change is started. Yes. As shown in FIG. 27, in the pre-reading notice of the background change by the display mode in which the background is white subjugation, the reliability is 25%. The reliability is lower than the hold notice 220b according to the aspect. The target of the pre-reading notice of the background change is not specified, but here, it corresponds to the pre-fetching notice in which the third hold held during the big hit game or the fourth hold is the notice target. In other words, the pre-reading notice that is newly started after the gaming state has transitioned to the jackpot gaming state is the first prefetching notice (here, the reliability is 30%) that had been performed before the gaming state transitioned to the jackpot gaming state. The notification is performed in a manner that is different from the holding notice 220b), which is a notification mode of Tonosama, and in which the reliability is lowered.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31, the notice target of the first look-ahead notice is the second hold, and the notice object of the second look-ahead notice is the third hold that is newly won during the big hit game or the fourth notice. Although the subject of notice differs between the first look-ahead notice and the second look-ahead notice, the notice object of the second look-ahead notice is also second place, and the first look-ahead notice and the second look-ahead notice You may make the subject of notice common. However, the type of the second look-ahead notice is a type in which the notice target cannot be specified. Here, the type of the second look-ahead notice may also be a type that can specify the notice target (for example, a change in hold icon or countdown).

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a pre-reading notice that can specify the notice target is executed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the pre-read notice that cannot specify the notice object.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 32, the hold icon change corresponds to the first prefetch notice, and the background change corresponds to the second prefetch notice.

  FIG. 32 shows a first special figure display device 212 and a second special figure display device 214. The state in which the stop symbol shown in FIG. 32A is displayed is a state in which there are three suspensions of special figure 1 and zero suspensions of special figure 2. In this example, the first look-ahead notice by the background change is performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, and the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a display mode of white subjugation. The second pre-reading notice here is a pre-reading notice in which the second hold in FIG. 1 is set as the notice object, but it is unknown from the player which pre-order notice is the notice object. Note that the second prefetch notice may be a prefetch notice in which a predetermined hold in FIG.

  In this example, an ST mode is prepared. In this ST mode, after the big hit game ends, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability variation state and easy entry state) is maintained while the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times). To a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (so-called normal state). The state shown in FIG. 32A is a state in which the remaining number of STs is 2, which is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, as the ST mode, after the big hit game is finished, the special figure high probability common figure high probability state (probability variation state and easy entry state) is displayed for a predetermined first number of times (for example, 70 times). Then, after maintaining the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (probability variation state and entry difficult state) for a predetermined second number of times (for example, four times) during the symbol variation display, A mode of shifting to a low probability normal figure low probability state (so-called normal state) may be adopted.

  In FIG.32 (b), the symbol fluctuation display about the 1st suspension of a special figure is started, and ST remaining frequency becomes one time. The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32B is still in the display mode of white subjugation, and the second prefetching notice is continued. In addition, during the symbol variation display started in FIG. 10B, there is one ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, and the number of special figures that have been held until now becomes one (see FIG. (Refer figure (c)). In FIG. 4D, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs stop display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative symbol lost. Since the pachinko machine 100 in this example is also a special 2 priority fluctuation machine, in FIG. 9E, the suspension of the special figure 2 is consumed, and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started. The symbol variation display started here corresponds to the last symbol variation display that maintains the special symbol high probability normal diagram low probability state. Further, the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5E is still in the display mode of white subjugation, and the second prefetching notice is continued. In the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 started in the same figure (e), as shown in the same figure (f) to (g), it develops to reach production, and a pre-reading notice is performed for this symbol variation display. Although not shown, “decoration 7” is aligned in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in i), “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A) is stopped and displayed. That is, a big hit is generated in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 started by winning the second special figure starting port 232 in FIG. The player holds the target of the second look-ahead notice in the state where the second look-ahead notice due to a background change whose unknown object is unknown is being performed (here, the second hold in FIG. 1). The illusion is as if you had a big hit. In addition, at the timing when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 started in FIG. 9E ends, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (so-called normal state) is entered.

  Eventually, the first round is started by the big hit game (see (j) in the figure), the 15th round is finished through the seventh round (see (k) in the figure), and the first sub-control unit 400 starts the end effect. A command is sent. In this example, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that there is no winning at the special figure starting port during the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 1L, an end image for notifying the end of the big hit game is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 at this timing, the hold display is restored, and the second hold in FIG. 1 is changed to the hold notice 220d that is a notification form of the bag, and the first prefetch notice is performed. That is, the first prefetch notice is started for the notice object common to the notice object of the second prefetch notice. In the first prefetching notice, the player can specify the notice target. Note that the first look-ahead notice based on the change of the hold icon can also be made for the hold in FIG.

  Next, an example will be described in which a default display mode (corresponding to an example of a predetermined display mode) is provided for each control state (gaming state).

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a default mode of a hold display prepared for each control state.

  The pachinko machine 100 here has a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (so-called normal state and corresponds to an example of the first control state), a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state (so-called latent state). Special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (so-called short time (electric support) state), special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (so-called electric support probability variation state) are prepared. Special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called latent state), special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (so-called short time (electric support) state), special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (so-called electric support probability change) State) corresponds to an example of a second control state. That is, the probability variation state or the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second control state.

  The pachinko machine 100 here is also a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and special figures 1 and 2 are prepared as special figures. In this example, a default mode of hold display is prepared for each special figure.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is in the short-time state, the default mode of the special figure 1 hold display displayed in the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a mode in which a square figure is displayed without any pattern and white. The default mode of the special figure 2 hold display is a mode in which a square figure is displayed without any pattern and in a single gray color. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is in the electric support positive change state, the default mode of the special figure 1 hold display is a mode in which a triangular figure is displayed without any pattern and white, and the default mode of the special figure 2 hold display is This is a mode in which a triangular figure is displayed without any pattern and in a single gray color. Furthermore, even if the control state is different, the default mode may be common, and when the pachinko machine 100 is in the normal state or the latent state, the default mode of the special figure 1 hold display is a round figure with no pattern and white color. The default mode of the special figure 2 hold display is a mode in which a round figure is displayed without any pattern and in a single gray color.

  By doing so, since the pre-reading notice is executed by changing from different default modes, it may be easy for the player to know that the gaming state has been changed. Moreover, even after the default mode is changed, it may be easy to specify the target start information. Furthermore, since the default mode of the hold display is changed before and after the change of the game state, the player may be able to know the change of the game state without moving the viewpoint.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the default mode of the hold display is different for each special figure.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34, the hold icon change corresponds to both the first prefetch notice and the second prefetch notice, and the type of the first prefetch notice and the type of the second prefetch notice are the same. The notification mode is different between the first prefetch notice and the second prefetch notice.

  FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of FIG. 1 is started from a state (not shown) where there are three suspensions of FIG. 1, and in the state shown in FIG. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is two. On the left side of the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (a), the special figure 1 hold display of the second hold is changed to a hold notice 220a which is a bad merchant notification mode. A pre-reading notice has been made. Also, the control state in FIG. 34 (a) is a normal state, and the first hold special figure 1 hold display 220h is displayed on the left side of the effect area 208d in a display form of a blank, solid, white figure. Yes.

  In FIG. 6B, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs stop display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative symbol lost. In FIG. 8C, the symbol variation display for the first hold indicated by the special figure 1 hold display 220h of a blank, white, round figure is started. Even at this stage, the hold notice 220a, which is a notification mode of bad merchants, is displayed, and the first prefetch notice is continuously performed. In the symbol variation display started in the same figure (c), as shown in the same figure (d) to (e), it has been developed into a reach effect, and no pre-reading notice has been given for this symbol variation display. However, as shown in FIG. 5F, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the 15R special big hit symbol (special illustration A) is stopped and displayed on the ornament symbol table device 208. At this stage, the special figure 1 has only one hold, and only the pre-reading notice is given. In addition, the reserved number in the special figure 2 is zero.

  Eventually, the big hit game is started and continues to the seventh round as shown in FIG. When the big hit game is started, the first look-ahead notice performed by the hold notice 220a which is a notification form of the bad merchant is canceled. In addition, there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 between the start of the big hit game and the seventh round, and in this example, there is a three ball entering the second special figure starting port 232. . Eventually, an end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the end of the big hit game is displayed on the ornament symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The end image is displayed. At this stage, the number of reservations of special figure 1 is two, and the number of reservations of special figure 2 is three. When the end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the second pre-reading notice is started without waiting for the symbol variation start command as in the example shown in FIG. In this example, the hold display 220h1 of the special figure 1 that has been displayed on the left side of the effect area 208d until now moves to the right side of the effect area 208d, and the hold display 220h2 of the special figure 2 appears on the left side of the effect area 208d. Is done. That is, the display position of the hold display 220h1 in the special figure 1 and the display position of the hold display 220h2 in the special figure 2 are switched. Also, the hold display 220h2 in the special figure 2 is displayed larger than the hold display 220h1 in the special figure 1. These position changes and size changes are because the pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and when the big hit game is completed, it shifts to the electric support state (short time state). The control state during the big hit game is a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state in order to suppress euphoria, but at the stage shown in FIG. In anticipation of the transition of the control state to the electric support accuracy change), the default display of the hold display has already been displayed in the state of the electric support accuracy change state. That is, the special figure 2 hold display 220h2 is displayed in a non-patterned and gray-colored triangle display mode, and the special figure 1 hold display 220h1 is displayed in a non-patterned and white-colored triangle display mode. Yes. In addition, the first pre-reading notice using the hold display in FIG. 1 remains suspended, whereas the second pre-reading notice using the hold display in FIG. 2 is started. Therefore, it can be said that the kind of special figure (difference between special figure 1 or special figure 2) to be noticed is different between the first prefetch notice and the second prefetch notice. Note that the first pre-reading notice using the hold display shown in FIG. 1 may be canceled because of the transition to the electric support state, or the second pre-reading notice has been started. For this reason, it may be canceled. Further, the hold display representing the second hold in FIG. 2 that has been changed as the second look-ahead notice is displayed using a notification mode dedicated to FIG. That is, in the description using FIG. 27, the reservation notice that is the notification mode of the princess has a reliability of 70% and appears in both the special map 1 and the special map 2, but here, The notice of hold 220e, which is a notification mode, is an aspect corresponding to a specific reliability that does not appear in the hold display of FIG. 1 but appears only in the hold display of FIG. In this way, if the type is the same in the first look-ahead notice and the second look-ahead notice, even if the second look-ahead notice is newly made, the player does not feel uncomfortable, There is no hindrance to the game. In addition, if the game state transitions during the pre-reading notice, the lottery result based on the start information subject to the pre-reading notice can be changed corresponding to the change of the gaming state if the first pre-reading notice is made There is a possibility that the first pre-reading notice may not be compatible with the gaming state after the transition to the gaming state. However, based on the transition of the gaming state, the first prefetching notice may be canceled and the second prefetching notice corresponding to the gaming state after the transition may be started, so that the prefetching notice can be performed without a sense of incongruity. is there. Furthermore, by prematurely canceling the pre-reading notice that was performed before the change of the game state, it is easy to inform the player that the game state has been switched.

  When the big hit game is finished, as shown in FIG. 5I, the special figure 2 priority fluctuation is performed, and the symbol fluctuation display based on the first hold of the special figure 2 is started. Here, the 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A) is won again in the symbol variation display started in FIG. 10 (i), and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. (Refer to (j) in the figure). When the jackpot game is started, the second pre-reading notice is canceled as with the first pre-fetching notice. Here, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, it is assumed that there was no winning at the special figure starting port during the second big hit game (see (k) in the figure). When the end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the second pre-reading notice (the holding notice 220e, which is the princess's notification mode) is resumed without waiting for the symbol variation start command (the figure). (See (l)). Here, when the big hit game ends, the second pre-reading notice is resumed in order to return to the same control state (electric power support probability change) as the control state in which the second pre-reading notice was started. In the case of shifting to a control state different from the control state in which the pre-reading notice is started, the second pre-reading notice may be stopped.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of second prefetch notices are executed in duplicate, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 35 to 36, a fixed (non-variable) special figure starting port and a variable special figure starting port are provided below the fixed special figure starting port. This is a starting point and no special figure 2 is prepared. Therefore, in FIGS. 35 and 36, the special figure 2 display device is not shown, and only the special figure 1 display device 212 is shown. In the example shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the prefetching notice due to the change in the hold icon corresponds to the first prefetching notice, and the prefetching notice due to the background change and the prefetching notice due to the action of the accessory correspond to the second prefetching notice. .

  FIG. 35 (a) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of FIG. 1 is started from a state (not shown) where there are four suspensions of FIG. 1, and in the state shown in FIG. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is three. In the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (a), the third reserved special figure 1 hold display is changed to a hold notice 220d which is a notification form of the bag, and the first look-ahead notice is displayed. Has been done. In addition, the control state in FIG. 35 (a) is a normal state, and the special figure 1 hold display 220h of the first hold and the second hold is displayed in the effect area 208d in a display form of a blank, white, round figure. Has been.

  In FIG. 6B, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs stop display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative symbol lost. In FIG. 8C, the symbol variation display for the first hold indicated by the special figure 1 hold display 220h of a blank, white, round figure is started. Also at this stage, the hold notice 220d (corresponding to the second hold display at this stage), which is a notification form of the bag, is displayed, and the first prefetch notice is continuously performed. In the symbol variation display started in the same figure (c), as shown in the same figure (d) to (e), it has been developed into a reach effect, and no pre-reading notice has been given for this symbol variation display. However, as shown in FIG. 5F, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the 15R special big hit symbol (special illustration A) is stopped and displayed on the ornament symbol table device 208. At this stage, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is two.

  In FIG. 5G, a winning effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the decorative image display device 208 shown in FIG. Character display image) is displayed. Even at the moment when the opening image is displayed, the second hold notice 220d is displayed and the first look-ahead notice is performed, but immediately, the second hold notice 220d disappears and the first hold notice 220d disappears. The pre-reading notice will be canceled. Then, the first round is started (see (h) in the figure), and until the seventh round, there are two balls entering the special figure starting port, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 becomes full (same as above). (Refer figure (i)). Eventually, an end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the end of the big hit game is displayed on the ornament symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The end image is displayed. At this stage, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is four. In the decorative symbol display device 208 at this timing, the hold display is restored, but the first look-ahead notice is not executed and remains suspended. That is, in anticipation of the transition of the control state to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (electric support probability change) immediately after this, the hold display 220h of the special figure 1 is a display form of a white triangle with no pattern. The hold display of the second hold at this timing does not change to the hold notice 220d which is the notification form of the bag. That is, no pre-reading notice with the hold icon is performed.

  When the big hit game is over, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (electric support probability change), and as shown in FIG. Be started. Simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display, a prefetching notice due to a background change is started as a second prefetching notice, and the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to the display mode of white subjugation. It should be noted that the first hold at this stage corresponds to the hold display displayed in the notification mode of the trap in the first look-ahead notice, that is, the notice object of the canceled first look-ahead notice, and the second hold is the player Although it cannot be specified from, it corresponds to the notice subject of the second look ahead notice.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a stop display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative symbol loss. At the timing when the symbol variation ends, another accessory action, which is another second pre-reading notice, is started, and the arm accessory production movable body A224 starts to move. The movement of the arm accessory here is “large”, and after the forearm portion 224b is turned from the initial posture in which the forearm portion 224b is bent to the warning posture in which the forearm portion 224b rotates downward, as shown by the dotted line, the forearm portion 224b Ascend to the “large” position The subject of the pre-reading notice by the arm accessory is different from the subject of the second pre-fetching notice due to the background change, and is the same as the subject of the canceled first pre-fetching notice. That is, the first hold at this stage is the subject of advance notice. However, in the second look-ahead notice by the action of the actor, unlike the first look-ahead notice, the player cannot specify the notice object. As described above, the second prefetch notice due to the background change and the second prefetch notice due to the action of the accessory are performed at the same time although the subject of the notice is different. In addition, you may make the notice object of the 2nd look-ahead notice by a background change and the notice object of the 2nd look-ahead notice by an action of an accessory common.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display for the first hold that was the subject of the second look-ahead notice by the action of the accessory is started (see FIG. 36 (b)), and shown in FIGS. (C) to (d). As described above, the reach effect is developed, but the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed ((e) in the figure). Therefore, the first prefetching notice by the hold notice 220d, which is the notification form of the bag, and the second prefetching notice by the accessory action are false prefetch notices. While the symbol variation display started in the same figure (b), the second pre-reading notice due to the background change that keeps the pending reservation (the first holding at this stage) as the notice subject is continued. At the timing when the symbol variation ends, the pre-reading notice by the accessory action, which is another second pre-reading notice, which is targeted for the symbol fluctuation, is not performed (see FIG. 5E). That is, the second look-ahead notice by the action of the accessory has ended just before the symbol variation starts.

  Furthermore, the symbol variation display for the hold that was the target of the second prefetch notice due to the background change is started (see FIG. 36F). The second prefetch notice due to the background change is continued even if the symbol variation that is the subject of the announcement starts, and continues until just before the symbol variation ends. The symbol variation display started in FIG. 10F has developed into a reach effect as shown in FIG. 11G, and in FIG. 11H, three “decorations 7” are arranged. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the second prefetch notice due to the background change is a true prefetch notice.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the control state is switched except for the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  In this example, the ST mode is also adopted. Here, after the big hit game ends, while the symbol variation display is performed 100 times, the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (electric support probability variation state: second control state of the second control state) The following description will be made on the assumption that the state shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (so-called normal state: equivalent to an example of the first control state) after the state is maintained. In other words, after the big hit game is completed, the 100th symbol variation display or the 101st symbol variation display is started corresponds to an example of a predetermined transition condition.

  The control state shown in FIG. 37 (a) is an electric support probability changing state, and is a state in which the 98th symbol variation display is finished after the big hit game is finished. Therefore, the remaining ST count is 2. Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 34, the relatively small special figure 1 hold display moves to the right side of the effect area 208d, and the relatively large special figure 2 hold display is displayed on the left side of the effect area 208d. ing. Further, according to the control state of the power support probability change state, the special figure 2 hold display 220h2 is displayed in a non-patterned and gray-colored triangle display mode, and the special figure 1 hold display 220h1 is blank and displayed. It is displayed in the display form of a white-colored triangle. Furthermore, the hold display representing the third hold in FIG. 2 is changed to a hold notice 220e in the princess notification mode, which is a notification mode dedicated to FIG. On the other hand, in the electric support state, the pre-reading notice for the special figure 1 is canceled or prohibited, and the pre-fetching notice for the special figure 1 is not performed.

  In FIG. 37 (b), due to the special figure 2 priority fluctuation, the symbol fluctuation display for the first suspension of the special figure 2 is started, and the ST remaining number becomes one. The hold display that was the third hold in FIG. 2 becomes the hold display of the second hold, and is still displayed in the hold notice 220e in the princess's notification mode, and the first prefetch notice continues. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a stop display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative symbol loss.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started again ((d) in the same figure), and the symbol variation display started here becomes the 100th symbol variation display after the big hit game ends, and the special symbol high probability Corresponds to the last symbol variation display that maintains the high probability state of the usual figure. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 37 (e), the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a stop display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols again. The probability state ends. In this example, when the symbol variation stop command instructing to stop and display the 100th symbol variation is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 after the end of the big hit game, the control state is the special figure high probability ordinary diagram. Transition from the high probability state to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the second prefetch notice condition is established. It should be noted that when the 101th symbol variation start command is transmitted after the big hit game is finished, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state may be entered.

  FIG. 37 (f) is a diagram showing a screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately before the 101th symbol variation display is started after the big hit game ends. With the transition from the electric support state to the non-electric support state, the hold display in FIG. 2 that has been displayed on the left side of the effect area 208d so far moves to the right side of the effect area 208d and moves to the left side of the effect area 208d. Is displayed on hold in FIG. That is, the display position of the hold display 220h1 in the special figure 1 and the display position of the hold display 220h2 in the special figure 2 are switched. Further, the hold display 220h1 in the special figure 1 is displayed larger than the hold display 220h2 in the special figure 2. Among the hold displays in FIG. 1 displayed on the left side of the effect area 208d, the hold display indicating the second hold is changed to a hold notice 220b in the form of notification, and a second prefetch notice is started. That is, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the first symbol variation start command after transitioning to the non-electric support state, the look-ahead for the special figure 1 that has been canceled because of the electric support state so far The notice is resumed. In addition, it can be seen that the pre-reading notice for the special figure 1 that has been prohibited because of the electric support state is started. Further, the second look-ahead notice for the special figure 1 may be started from the time when the special figure high probability common figure high probability state shown in FIG. The second pre-reading notice for Special Figure 1 started here can be seen as a kind of first pre-reading notice. On the other hand, the hold display representing the first hold in FIG. 2 displayed on the right side of the effect area 208d is still displayed as the hold notice 220e in the princess notification mode, and the first look-ahead notice started before the control state shifts. Continues even after the transition to the control state.

  When the second pre-reading notice (special notice hold notice 220b) for Special Figure 1 is also regarded as the first pre-read notice, a plurality of first look-ahead notices (hold notice 220b, hold notices) with different degrees of reliability. If a prefetching notice (second prefetching notice) is started for a player who is confused by the execution of the notice 220e), the player may be confused if the prefetch notice (second prefetch notice) is started in a manner in which the notice object cannot be specified. . In addition, there may be a case where a sense of expectation for the notified start information with low reliability can be restored.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a prefetch notice of a type different from the prefetch type illustrated in FIG. 27 is executed.

  First, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the example shown in FIG. 38 is an example in which the special figure 2 is not prepared and only the special figure 1 is prepared. Also in this example, a pre-reading notice by changing the hold icon is performed as the first prefetching notice. That is, in the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a), the second reserved special figure 1 hold display is changed to a hold notice 220b which is a notification form of the lord. Note that the control state of FIG. 38A is a normal state, and the special map 1 hold display 220h of the first hold is displayed in a default notification mode in which a round graphic is displayed without any pattern and white.

  Further, in this example, a pre-reading notice using four LED lamps 2091 to 2094 provided separately from the decorative symbol display device 208 is also performed. These four LED lamps 2091 to 2094 have the same function as the on-hold display in the decorative symbol display device 208 described so far, and are stored in the on-hold storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 in the main control unit 300. Lights corresponding to a set of starting information. In the state shown in FIG. 38A, the left two LED lamps 2091 and 2092 of the four LED lamps 2091 to 2094 are lit in a predetermined color, and the first hold and the second hold are stored. To the player. The four LED lamps 2091 to 2094 are lit in a predetermined color, and the lighting mode (driving mode) is the default lighting mode. In the state shown in FIG. 38A, the pre-reading using the LED lamps 2091 to 2094 is performed. No notice is given. In the same figure (a), the special symbol variation display is started, and after the reach effect as shown in the same figure (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (c) has a 15R special big hit symbol ( “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7” corresponding to the special figure A) is stopped and displayed.

  Subsequently, the first round is started by the big hit game (see FIG. 4D). The first look-ahead notice by changing the hold icon is canceled when the big hit game is started. Eventually, the 15th round ends, and an end effect start command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, there are two balls in the special figure starting port during the big hit game, and the special figure hold is full. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5E, an end image of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the end of the big hit game is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 at this timing, the hold display has been restored, but any hold display 220h is displayed in the default display mode, and no pre-reading notice is made by changing the hold icon. That is, the second hold notice 220b is switched to the default hold display 220h, and the first prefetch notice is stopped. Instead, a prefetching notice using the LED lamps 2091 to 2094 is started as the second prefetching notice. The four LED lamps shown in FIG. 38 (e) are all lit, and the LED lamp 2092 representing the second hold from the left is different in lighting mode from the other LED lamps 2091, 2093, and 2094. Yes. That is, the LED lamp 2092 representing the second hold is lit in a lighting mode different from the default lighting mode, and a second prefetch notice is performed. This second prefetching notice shares the notice object with the canceled first prefetching notice, and is a prefetch notice that allows the player to specify the notice object. Note that the prefetching notice using the LED lamp 2092 can also be viewed as a first prefetching notice different from the first prefetching notice due to the suspended hold icon change.

  In addition, although there is a point which overlaps with what was demonstrated above, it supplements below about what leads to the whole demonstrated here.

  The first pre-reading notice may be performed in a mode that can specify the hold of the notice target, and the second pre-reading notice may be made in a form that cannot specify the hold of the notice target. In this way, even if the first prefetching notice is missed while increasing the degree of attention to the first prefetching notice, there are cases where the second prefetching notice can be used for relief. The pre-reading notice may be in any form that can specify the hold of the notice target of the pre-reading notice. In addition to the image display and lamp display described above, the visual and sound output, vibration transmission, etc. An embodiment using other five senses may be used. In addition, by performing the first pre-reading notice to be performed in advance in a manner in which the start information subject to the notice cannot be specified, for example, a big hit due to the interruption of the special figure 2 as shown in FIG. Even if there is still a promising hold that is the subject of the first look-ahead notice, the player will not realize that. In particular, when the first prefetch notice cannot be specified and the second prefetch notice can be specified, the player may be surprised at the start of the second prefetch notice. Furthermore, by changing the start-up information that is the subject of the advance notice in the form that allows the first pre-fetch notice to be performed in advance, the notice form is changed based on the establishment of the second look-ahead notice condition (specific notice condition) If you do, you may be able to attract more player attention. In particular, when the second pre-reading notice is performed in such a manner that the start information cannot be specified, whether the second pre-reading notice is the same as the first pre-reading notice or other holds that can be expected are stored. In some cases, the player can be expected in an indistinguishable manner, and the interest of the game table can be improved more effectively. In addition, after executing the pre-reading notice of jackpot determination in a notification mode in which the target of notification as shown in FIG. 25 (i) cannot be specified, a second pre-reading notice (not even if the target of the notification can be specified cannot be determined). May be executed.

  Note that the jackpot reliability of the first prefetch notice and the second prefetch notice that are performed before and after the second prefetch notice condition (specific notice condition) is satisfied may be substantially the same.

  Further, at least one of the first prefetch notice and the second prefetch notice may be a dedicated prefetch notice that can be started only in a specific gaming state. Even if it becomes impossible to execute the dedicated pre-reading notice due to a sudden change in the gaming state, there is a case where the player does not feel uncomfortable by adopting a design that can start an alternative pre-reading notice.

  In addition, after the first prefetching notice is finished, the first prefetching notice regarding the same determination may not be performed at least until the second prefetching notice is finished. That is, the execution of the first prefetch notice regarding the same determination of success / failure may be prohibited.

  In addition, after the first prefetch notice is completed, only the second prefetch notice is likely to be executed among the prefetch notices for the result of the determination of whether the first prefetch notice is applicable. Also good.

  In addition, the second look-ahead notice may be performed only during the big hit or may be performed only during the electric support.

  The first look-ahead notice may have a jackpot reliability of 100% (so-called iron plate notice or jackpot confirmation notice). In addition, after the first prefetch notice is finished, the prefetch notice regarding the non-priority side determination may not be performed. In other words, execution of the pre-reading notice regarding the determination of whether or not the non-priority side is present may be prohibited. Furthermore, there may be a period in which the prefetching notice (notification based on the start information) is not performed between the cancellation of the first prefetching notice and the start of the second prefetching notice. That is, a prefetch notice prohibition period may be provided. By performing the second prefetching notice again with the expectation completely flattened by the first prefetching notice, the expectation generated by the second prefetching notice is not affected by the other prefetching notices.

  In the special priority 2 aircraft, the first prefetch notice is made based on the start information of FIG. 1, and the second prefetch notice is made based on the start information of FIG. There may be. While preventing the stocks that are advantageous for the suspension of the special figure 1, the pre-reading notice for the suspension of the special figure 2 is executed, thereby ensuring the fairness of the game and reducing the interest of the game stand. There may be no.

  Further, the timing at which the second start information to be subject to the second prefetch notice is stored in the start information storage means may be before the second prefetch notice condition (specific notice condition) is established, It may be later.

  In addition, the transition of the gaming state may be a transition to a gaming state having a different advantage of the player across the “big hit” such as normal state → big hit gaming state → high probability state, etc. You may transfer to the gaming state from which a player's advantage differs, without pinching.

  Alternatively, the first prefetch notice may be canceled simultaneously with the execution of the second prefetch notice.

  Further, at the time when the first pre-reading notice is made, the second pre-reading notice subject to the second pre-fetching notice is stored in the starting information storage means, but the first pre-reading notice is made. Therefore, execution of the prefetching notice based on the second start information is restricted, and the restriction is released based on the fact that the second prefetching notice condition (specific notice condition) is established in that state. The second prefetch notice based on the second start information may be started.

  Further, the first pre-reading notice and the second pre-reading notice are pre-reading notices for the starting information stored in the starting information storage means, and the pre-reading notices in the symbol variation based on the target starting information are The notice may be made in the same manner.

  In addition, at least a reach (such as a super-reach beyond normal reach) occurs in the symbol variation display performed based on the start-up information that is the target of the pre-reading notice (second pre-reading notice) that cannot be specified. Also good. Even after it becomes unspecified, there is a case where the reach is generated and the player's expectation generated by the pre-reading notice is not idle.

  In addition, in the symbol variation display performed based on the start information targeted for the pre-reading notice (first pre-reading notice) that can identify the advance notice target, it may be an aspect in which reach does not occur. In spite of this, the player may feel dissatisfied if even the reach does not occur. Therefore, the dissatisfaction may be suppressed by making the target unidentifiable in the second look-ahead notice.

  Furthermore, although the example which applied this invention to the pachinko machine was demonstrated here, this invention is applicable also to a rotation game machine (slot machine).

In the above description, “when a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of holdings is greater than 0), a determination unit (for example, a determination unit that can execute at least determination / non-execution (for example, special drawing related lottery processing)). , CPU 304) of main control unit 300;
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is satisfied (for example, when neither special symbol variation display nor stop display is being performed and the special diagram is not in operation), after the symbol variation is performed, the result of the above-described determination of validity is handled. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of at least executing the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol mode (for example, the symbol mode shown in FIG. 5A). When,
When a predetermined prefetch notice condition is satisfied (for example, when the prefetch notice execution condition or the prefetch notice start condition is selected), at least a prefetch notice (for example, the prefetch type shown in FIG. 27) can be started. Prefetching notice means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, production movable body A224, production movable body B225),
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
When the first prefetch notice condition is satisfied (for example, when the first prefetch notice execution lottery at the time of starting entry is won), the predetermined prefetch notice condition is established,
Even when a second pre-reading notice condition different from the first pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (for example, when the second pre-reading notice lottery at the time of symbol fluctuation stoppage is won), the predetermined pre-reading notice condition Is true,
When the first prefetch notice condition is satisfied (for example, when the first prefetch notice execution lottery at the time of starting entry is won), the prefetch notice means uses the first prefetch notice as the prefetch notice. (For example, hold notice: pre-read notice by changing the hold icon shown in FIG. 27) can be executed,
The prefetching notice means, when the second prefetching notice condition is satisfied after the first prefetching notice is started (for example, when the second prefetching notice lottery at the time of symbol change stop is won) Can execute a second prefetching advance notice (for example, a movable object advance notice by an arm accessory: a prefetch advance notice by an action of an accessory shown in FIG. 27) as the prefetch notice.
The aspect of the second prefetch notice is different from the aspect of the first prefetch notice,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first prefetching notice and the second prefetching notice are prefetching notices (for the same notice object) regarding the same determination result. Is explained.

  A plurality of types may be prepared for the prefetch notice here (hereinafter the same). In this case, if the type of the prefetch notice is different, the mode is inevitably different. Therefore, the second prefetch notice differs from the first prefetch notice. In addition, the aspect mentioned here is prepared in plurality in one kind of classification. The type referred to here may be any type that allows the player to identify that the same type of pre-reading notice is being made. For example, it is preferable that the images are similar or are related in time series. However, even if the player cannot be identified (even if it is difficult to identify), it may be set as the same type in the game table.

  Further, the different aspects may include different reliability levels (hereinafter the same). For example, the second prefetch notice may be less reliable than the first prefetch notice. If the reliability is increased based on the establishment of the second look-ahead notice condition (specific notice condition), there is a risk that the player will be beaten excessively. A pre-reading notice may be made.

  Here, the second look-ahead notice condition (specific notice condition) may be the start or end of a big hit game (special game state), or the start or end of a probable big hit game (hereinafter the same). For example, the first prefetch notice is canceled based on the occurrence of a jackpot during the execution of the first prefetch notice, and the second prefetch notice based on the second start information is started during the jackpot. Also good. Further, the lottery probability may be reduced from high to low based on a predetermined number of symbol variation display from the previous big hit, or a predetermined number of symbol variation display has been performed from the previous big hit. On the basis of this, the electric support may be terminated, or a predetermined falling lottery may be won and the lottery probability may be lowered from high to low (the same applies hereinafter). By doing so, the aspect of the pre-reading notice differs according to the change of the game state, and it is easy to convey to the player that the game state has changed. In addition, it is difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity by changing the mode of the pre-reading notice at the same time as the occurrence of a big hit that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, by changing the mode of the pre-reading notice at the same time as the occurrence of the probable big hit, it is easy to inform the player that the gaming state after the big hit is more advantageous than usual. In addition, it is easier to maintain the expectation for the front symbol variation display than when the pre-reading notice is executed in a highly reliable manner before the big hit. In addition, even if the establishment of the above conditions is disadvantageous for the player, the second pre-reading notice that is more likely to be expected than the first pre-fetching notice is executed based on the establishment of the specific notice condition. , It is difficult for players to be dissatisfied. In addition, a specific timer may be selected by timer lottery based on start information (the same applies hereinafter).

  In addition, the first prefetch notice may be configured to identify target start information, and the second prefetch notice may also be configured to identify target start information. In the multiple pre-reading notices that are performed in such a manner that the starting information can be specified, the reliability differs depending on each of the pre-reading notices. It is possible to change only the player's expectation on the starting information.

  In addition, the first prefetch notice may be configured to identify target start information, and the second prefetch notice may be configured to not identify target start information. The expectation of the player who has been concentrated only on the start information to be notified can be distributed to a plurality of start information stored in the start information storage means.

  In addition, the first prefetch notice may be configured such that target start information cannot be specified, and the second prefetch notice may be configured such that target start information can be specified. In some cases, the player's expectation that has been distributed among the plurality of start information stored in the start information storage means can be concentrated on the specific start information.

  In addition, the first pre-reading notice may be configured in such a manner that target start information cannot be specified, and the second pre-reading notice may be configured in such a manner that target start information cannot be specified. Before and after the notice mode is changed, the start information subject to notice cannot be specified, so when the second look-ahead notice is made, it differs from the start information subject to the first look-ahead notice. In some cases, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that the pre-reading notice is newly started with respect to the start information, thereby improving the interest of the game table.

In addition, in the description so far, “the prefetching notice means that the second prefetching notice condition is satisfied before the first prefetching notice (for example, prefetching notice by changing the hold icon) is started”. In some cases (for example, when the second pre-reading notice execution lottery is won), as the pre-reading notice, the second pre-reading notice (for example, the pre-reading notice by the on-hold Renzo notice) can be executed.
The second prefetching notice is a prefetching notice (for example, with a reliability of 30%) that has a higher probability than the first prefetching notice that a specific success / failure determination result is derived as a result of the determination of whether or not the prefetching is subject to the prefetching notice. 100% of the game table). Is also explained.

In addition, in the description so far, “the prefetching notice means determines whether the first prefetching notice (for example, the prefetching notice due to the change of the hold icon) ends (for example, the result of the determination as to whether the prefetching notice is a target of the first prefetching notice). When the second pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (for example, when the second pre-reading notice execution lottery is won) until the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol mode corresponding to the above is started) The first look-ahead notice can be canceled (for example, see FIG. 28 (i)),
When the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied after the first prefetch notice has been started, the prefetch notice means, at least after the first prefetch notice is stopped, A game machine that is capable of starting a pre-reading advance notice (e.g., a pre-reading advance notice by an action of an accessory or a pre-reading advance notice by an on-hold Rensou notice). Is also explained.

  For example, the pre-reading notice unit sets the second pre-reading notice condition before the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol form corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not the first prefetching notice is made is started. If established, the first prefetch notice may be cancelled.

In addition, in the description so far, “the second prefetching notice is a prefetching notice (for example, a trustworthy notice) in which a specific determination result (for example, a big hit) is necessarily derived as a result of the determination of the validity of the prefetching notice. Is a pre-reading notice by the notification of the reservation in the reservation is 100%)
The first look-ahead notice is a look-ahead notice that derives a specific result determination result or a result determination result (for example, a loss) that is different from the specific result determination result. (For example, a look-ahead notice by changing a hold icon whose reliability is 3% to 100%). Is also explained.

In addition, in the explanation so far, “the first start area (for example, the first special figure start port 230),
A second starting area different from the first starting area (for example, the second special figure starting port 232);
When a start information storage condition including at least that the game ball has entered the first start area or the second start area is satisfied (for example, when the number of holdings is less than a predetermined upper limit number) Starting information storage means (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) capable of storing the starting information of
Start hold display means means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing start hold display in a predetermined display mode (for example, default mode) for each start information stored in the start information storage means. ,
The start hold display means is
The predetermined display mode is different between a first control state (for example, a normal state) and a second control state (for example, a probability change state or a power support state) different from the first control state. It is possible to perform a start hold display (see, for example, FIG. 33)
The first notice notice can be executed by serving as the pre-read notice means and displaying the start hold display in a first display form (for example, a bad merchant notice form) different from the predetermined display form,
By displaying the start-up hold display in a second display mode different from the predetermined display mode (for example, the princess notification mode shown in FIG. 34 (h), etc.), the second advance notice can be executed. A game stand characterized by that. Is also explained.

  The start information storage means (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) can store start information generated based on a game ball entering the first start area or the second start area. It may be anything.

  Further, the start hold display means is between the start information generated based on entering the first start area and the start information generated based on entering the second start area. However, it may be one (for example, see FIG. 33) capable of performing the start hold display by changing the predetermined display mode.

  The first control state here may be a non-probability change state or a non-electric support state, and the second control state may be a probability change state or an electric support state. That is, the control is performed between the difficult-to-enter control state in which the game ball does not easily enter the second start-up area and the easy-to-enter control state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start-up area. If it is an aspect provided with the approach state transition control means for transitioning the state, the first control state may be an entry difficult control state, and the second control state may be an easy entry control state. Alternatively, a probability state transition control unit that shifts the control state between a probability non-variable state and a probability variation state in which a derivation probability of a specific success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination unit is higher than the probability non-variable state. If it is the aspect provided, the first control state may be a non-probability state, and the second control state may be a probability state.

Further, in the above explanation, “when a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of holdings is larger than 0), the determination is made that at least the determination of success / failure (for example, special drawing related lottery processing) can be performed (For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300);
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is satisfied (for example, when neither special symbol variation display nor stop display is being performed and the special diagram is not in operation), after the symbol variation is performed, the result of the above-described determination of validity is handled. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of at least executing the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol mode (for example, the symbol mode shown in FIG. 5A). When,
When a predetermined prefetch notice condition is satisfied (for example, when the prefetch notice execution condition or the prefetch notice start condition is selected), at least a prefetch notice (for example, the prefetch type shown in FIG. 27) can be started. Prefetching notice means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, production movable body A224, production movable body B225),
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
When the first prefetch notice condition is satisfied (for example, when the first prefetch notice execution lottery at the time of starting entry is won), the predetermined prefetch notice condition is established,
Even when a second pre-reading notice condition different from the first pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (for example, when the second pre-reading notice lottery at the time of symbol fluctuation stoppage is won), the predetermined pre-reading notice condition Is true,
When the first prefetch notice condition is satisfied (for example, when the first prefetch notice execution lottery at the time of starting entry is won), the prefetch notice means uses the first prefetch notice as the prefetch notice. (For example, hold notice: pre-read notice by changing the hold icon shown in FIG. 27) can be executed,
The prefetching notice means, when the second prefetching notice condition is satisfied after the first prefetching notice is started (for example, when the second prefetching notice lottery at the time of symbol change stop is won) Can execute a second prefetching advance notice (for example, a movable object advance notice by an arm accessory: a prefetch advance notice by an action of an accessory shown in FIG. 27) as the prefetch notice.
The aspect of the second prefetch notice is different from the aspect of the first prefetch notice,
The first look-ahead notice is a look-ahead notice regarding the result of the first success / failure determination,
The gaming table, wherein the second prefetch notice is a prefetch notice (for a different notice object) related to a second result determination result different from the first result determination result. Is explained.

  Here, the prefetch notice unit is configured to be able to execute a plurality of prefetch notices, and the plurality of prefetch notices may have different types of notices. In addition, the prefetch notice unit may be configured to execute a plurality of prefetch notices, and the plurality of prefetch notices may have different aspects of the prefetch notice. In addition, in one type, one or a plurality of prefetching notices may be further included, and the plurality of prefetching notices may have different notice modes. Further, the prefetching notice means may start the prefetching notice in such a manner that the target starting information can be specified, or may start the prefetching notice in a manner in which the target starting information cannot be specified. Good.

Further, in the description so far, “the prefetching notice means determines that the second prefetching notice condition is satisfied before the end of the first prefetching notice (for example, the prefetching notice due to the change of the hold icon) (for example, In the case of winning the second prefetch notice execution lottery), the first prefetch notice can be canceled (for example, see FIG. 28 (i))
When the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied after the first prefetch notice (for example, the prefetch notice by changing the hold icon) is started, the prefetch notice means displays the first prefetch notice. A game table characterized by being capable of starting (for example, see FIG. 29 (a)) the second pre-reading advance notice (for example, the pre-reading advance notice by an accessory action) at least after being canceled. Is also explained.

  For example, the pre-reading notice unit sets the second pre-reading notice condition before the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol form corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not the first prefetching notice is made is started. If established, the first prefetch notice may be cancelled.

Further, in the description so far, “the prefetching notice means can execute a plurality of prefetching notices of different types (for example, the prefetching type shown in FIG. 27),
The game table characterized in that the second prefetch notice is of the same type as the first prefetch notice (for example, the example shown in FIG. 34). Is also explained.

  That is, a plurality of modes are prepared for each type in the prefetch notice.

In addition, in the description so far, “the prefetching notice means uses the third prefetching notice when the second prefetching notice (for example, the prefetching notice by the family crest character shown in FIG. 28 (i)) is satisfied. It is possible to start a notice (for example, a look-ahead notice by an arm accessory shown in FIG. 29A),
The third look-ahead notice is a look-ahead notice regarding the first success / failure determination result,
The gaming table according to claim 3, wherein the third prefetch notice is different from the first prefetch notice in one or both of the mode and the type. Is also explained.

In addition, in the explanation so far, “when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, when the symbol variation display is performed 100 times after the big hit game is finished), the first gaming state (for example, the normal state) ) And a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (for example, the electric support probability changing state), the game state transition means capable of at least shifting the gaming state from one to the other,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the gaming state is shifted, the second pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (for example, see the example shown in FIG. 37). Is also explained.

In addition, in the above description, “a start in which start information can be stored every time a predetermined storage condition is satisfied (for example, when there is a winning at the special drawing start port and the number of holds is less than the predetermined number). Information storage means;
When a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of holds is larger than 0), it is possible to execute at least a determination of success / failure based on the start information, and when a predetermined hold condition is satisfied (for example, In the case of special figure fluctuation display, special figure stop display, or special figure in operation)
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is satisfied (for example, when neither special symbol variation display nor stop display is being performed and the special diagram is not in operation), after the symbol variation is performed, the result of the above-described determination of validity is handled. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of at least executing the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol mode (for example, the symbol mode shown in FIG. 5A). When,
If the predetermined notice condition is satisfied, the notice object is displayed prior to the execution of the symbol variation display in which the symbol form corresponding to the result of the decision on the basis of the start information on which the execution of the decision on validity is suspended is stopped and displayed. Notice means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, effect movable body A224, effect movable body B225) capable of starting at least a notice about the result of the determination of whether or not
The predetermined notice condition includes a specific notice condition,
The notice means starts after a first notice (for example, a notice of hold: a look-ahead notice by changing a hold icon shown in FIG. 27), and the specific notice condition is satisfied (for example, when symbol fluctuation is stopped). After the second pre-reading notice lottery is won), the second notice (for example, for the notice object that is the same as the notice object of the first notice or different from the notice object of the first notice (for example, The movable object notice by the arm accessory: the pre-read notice by the action of the accessory shown in FIG.
The first notice is based on an aspect (for example, a change in the hold icon) that can specify the hold for the start information for which the execution of the right / no-go determination for deriving the result of the right / no-go determination to be the target of the first notice is held. And
The second notice is based on an aspect (for example, an action of an accessory) that cannot specify a hold for starting information on which execution of the validity determination for deriving a result of the validity determination to be a target of the second notice is suspended. A game table characterized by In addition, the result of the determination of whether or not the notice is to be made may be a result of determination on the basis of start information on which execution of the determination of the determination is suspended.

In addition, in the description so far, “the start information storage means includes first start information (for example, start information generated based on a ball entering the first special figure start port 230), and the first start information. Second start information different from the start information (for example, start information generated based on the entrance to the second special figure start port 232) can be stored at least,
The notice means is capable of starting the first notice (for example, a pre-read notice by changing the hold icon) based on the first start information, and the first notice information is also based on the second start information. Can start a notice,
The advance notice means performs the second advance notice (the second hold of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 32 (a)) based on at least one of the start information of the first start information and the second start information. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of starting a pre-reading notice based on a background change as a subject of notice. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “the notice means has established the specific notice condition in a state in which one or a plurality of the first notices are started (for example, the state shown in FIG. 30D). In the case (for example, when winning the second pre-reading notice execution lottery at the start of symbol variation), it is possible to cancel at least one of the first notices or the first notice that has been started. A gaming table characterized by being (for example, see FIG. 30 (e)). Is also explained.

In addition, in the description so far, “the first notice started based on the first start information includes a first mode (for example, a notification mode shown in FIG. 37 (f)),
The first notice that is started based on the second starting information is composed of a second mode different from the first mode (for example, a princess notification mode shown in FIG. 37A),
The first notice that is started based on the first start information corresponds to the specific success / failure determination result in the symbol variation in which the symbol form corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not to be the notice is stopped and displayed. The probability (for example, reliability) that the symbol pattern to be stopped is displayed is different from the first notice that is started based on the second start information (for example, the second mode rather than the first mode). A game stand characterized by a higher aspect). Is also explained.

Here, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, when the symbol variation display is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game), the first game state (for example, the normal state) and the first game state A game state transition means capable of shifting at least the game state from one of the second game states (for example, the electric support probability change state) more advantageous than the game state;
In the gaming state transition means, a symbol mode (for example, special symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (a)) corresponding to a specific determination result (for example, 15R special jackpot) is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit. Based on the first gaming state, the gaming state can be shifted to the second gaming state (for example, the gaming state can be shifted to the second gaming state after the big hit game in the first gaming state). Also good.

  In the description so far, “the notice means is capable of starting the second notice for the same notice object as the first notice (for example, see FIG. 30 (e)). A game stand characterized by being. Is also explained.

  In the above description, “starting information storage means (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) capable of storing the starting information generated based on the game ball entering the starting area up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the starting Start information acquisition means for acquiring start information from the information storage means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and determination of whether or not to make a determination based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means and derive a result of the determination Based on the means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process) and the result of the success / failure determination is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, a big hit), the advantage to the player is increased. A second control state (eg, a second advantage that is different from the first advantage from a first control state (eg, a non-hit gaming state) that is a first advantage. For example, the control state transition means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that shifts the control state to the big hit game state, and until the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the determination is stopped and displayed after the symbol variation is started. The symbol display means (for example, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214) for performing the symbol fluctuation display of the above, and the success / failure determination means to the predetermined start information stored in the start information storage means Prior to making the determination of whether or not the vehicle is based on the predetermined start information, the determination of whether or not the result of the determination based on the predetermined start information becomes the specific result of the determination of the correct or incorrect, and the determination unit determines whether or not the predetermined start information The notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect movable body A224, which start before the determination of whether or not based on the And a first notice notification for notifying that the result of the determination on the basis of the predetermined starting information becomes the specific determination result (on the basis). For example, after the start of the notice notification based on the lottery using the first table shown in FIG. 16A, the symbol variation display is started to stop and display the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the determination. The first notice notification based on the fact that a predetermined trigger has been established before (for example, receiving a power recovery command or receiving a symbol fluctuation stop command including a special symbol determination result of 15R jackpot symbol) And a second notice for notifying that the result of the validity determination based on the same start information as the predetermined start information becomes the specific determination result (for example, the first notification shown in FIG. 18). Use 2 tables The game table is characterized in that the notice notification based on the lottery that has been started) is started with a predetermined probability after the predetermined opportunity is established. Is explained.

  Here, the notice means is executing a first notice for notifying that the result of the validity determination based on the predetermined start information becomes the specific validity determination result, and the result of the validity determination Before the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol mode corresponding to is started, the execution of the first notice is stopped at a predetermined timing based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger, and the predetermined start A second advance notice for notifying that the result of the success / failure determination based on the same start information as the information becomes the specific success / failure determination result, at a timing before the predetermined timing and after the predetermined timing. It may start with a predetermined probability at any one of the timing and the same timing as the predetermined timing. That is, the second notice is started after the predetermined trigger is established, and may be started after the first notice is stopped, or the first notice is stopped. It may be started before or may be started simultaneously with the cancellation of the first notice.

  In addition, the notice means is executing a first notice for notifying that the result of the determination on the basis of the predetermined start information becomes the specific result of the determination, and the result of the determination is Before the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the corresponding symbol mode is started, the execution of the first notice is stopped based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger, and the same start information as the predetermined start information is displayed. You may perform the 2nd alerting | reporting alert | report for notifying that the result of the success / failure determination based on starting information will turn into the said specific success / failure determination result with a predetermined probability.

  Further, it includes a notice mode determining means for determining a notice mode in a notice notice for notifying that the result of the decision as to whether or not the result will be the specific result result, and the notice means determines the notice notice as the notice mode determination means. The notice mode determination means stops and displays the symbol form corresponding to the result of the determination as to whether or not the predetermined notice has been started in the first notice mode. The notice mode in the predetermined notice notice may be re-determined based on the fact that the predetermined trigger is established before the symbol variation display for starting is started. The notice mode determining means may determine the notice mode by lottery. For example, a mode in which one type of notice mode is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of notice modes prepared may be determined, or whether or not the notice mode is to be changed based on the fact that a predetermined opportunity has been established. By doing so, the notice mode may be redetermined.

  Further, the notice unit may continuously perform the notice notice when the notice notice is started, or may perform the notice notice intermittently at a predetermined timing.

  Here, when the success / failure determination means derives the specific success / failure determination result, the entrance size is changed from the first variable state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second variable state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The aspect provided with the variable prize apparatus to be made may be sufficient. In other words, the variable winning device may be one that opens after the symbol display means stops and displays the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the specific success / failure determination. According to the above aspect, the variable winning device is capable of changing the state between a first state in which it is difficult to win a game ball and a second state in which it is easier to win a game ball than the first state, The control state transition means is configured so that the variable winning device is changed from the first control state in which the variable winning device maintains the first state based on the result of the determination of whether or not the winning is determined. You may provide the game state transfer means (big hit game transfer means) which transfers a control state to the 2nd control state which repeats a state change between said 1st state and said 2nd state.

  In addition, the control state transition means includes a difficult-to-enter control state (for example, a non-electric support state) in which a game ball is unlikely to enter a predetermined start area, and a game ball in the predetermined start area than the difficult-to-enter control state. Even if it is an aspect provided with an approach state transition control means (electric support state transition means) that shifts the control state based on the result of the success / failure determination between an easy entry control state (for example, an electric support state) that is easy to enter Good.

  Further, the control state transition means includes a probability non-change state (for example, a non-probability change state) and a probability change state in which a probability of deriving a specific success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination means is higher than the probability non-change state ( For example, an aspect may be provided that includes a probability variation state transition control means for transitioning the control state to / from the probability variation state based on the determination result. In particular, the transition from the non-probability state to the probability variation state by the probability state transition control unit may be performed only when a specific determination result is derived by the determination unit. The transition from the probability fluctuation state to the probability non-fluctuation state may be performed when a specific success / failure determination result is not derived by the success / failure determination unit. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the state is shifted to a non-probability state when a predetermined number of special figure changes are performed in the probability change state.

  In addition, the notice means is executing a first notice for notifying that the result of the determination on the basis of the predetermined start information becomes the specific result of the determination, and the result of the determination is Before the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the corresponding symbol mode is started, the execution of the first notice is stopped based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger, and the same start information as the predetermined start information is displayed. You may start the 2nd alerting | reporting notification for notifying that the result of the success / failure determination based on starting information turns into the said specific | correction determination result with a predetermined probability after the said predetermined opportunity is materialized. The execution of the first notice notification here may be a state in which the control for performing the first notice notice is continued, and it does not matter whether the first notice notice is actually notified. For example, it has a symbol display means for performing a series of symbol variation display from the start of symbol variation to the stop display of the symbol aspect, and the predetermined light emitting means lights for a predetermined time at the timing of symbol variation start, and thereafter In the case of the first notice notification of the notice mode that remains off during the symbol variation display, the light emitting means is turned on at the timing of symbol variation start, and during the subsequent symbol variation display. Even when the light emitting means remains off, it corresponds to executing the first notice.

  Also, starting information deriving means for deriving starting information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting area, starting information storage means capable of storing the starting information derived by the starting information deriving means up to a predetermined upper limit number, The aspect provided with this may be sufficient.

  Further, before the success / failure determination means performs the determination of success / failure, the startup information prefetching means for prefetching the startup information stored in the startup information storage means, and the predetermined information stored in the startup information storage means Before the determination on the basis of the start information is performed by the determination unit, the predetermined determination result read-ahead by the start-up information pre-reading unit whether or not the corresponding determination unit derives the specific determination result. Prior determination means for preliminarily determining based on start-up information, and notice for notifying that the result of the determination of success / failure becomes the specific result of determination of correct / failure before the determination of success / failure is made. The start notification means may be provided, and further, the predetermined start information stored in the start information storage means may be stored in advance before the success / failure determination means performs the determination. Thus, a pre-determining means for pre-determining based on the predetermined start information that pre-reads whether or not the determination of whether or not the determination based on the predetermined start information results in the specific determination result and the result of the determination on the success or failure Notice means for notifying that the result of the determination of the result is a specific result of the determination, the notification means starting at a predetermined probability before the determination of whether the result is correct or not based on the predetermined start information. An aspect may be sufficient.

  Furthermore, a symbol display means capable of stopping and displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of the success / failure, and a symbol display control means for causing the symbol display means to perform symbol variation display before the symbol aspect stop display is provided. An aspect may be sufficient.

  In addition, in the description so far, “the notice means executes the first notice notice in a mode (for example, countdown notice) in which the predetermined start information can be specified. Amusement stand. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “start hold display (for example, hold display 220h, 218h) is performed in a predetermined display mode for each start information stored in the start information storage means and stored in the start information storage means. A start hold number notification means (for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208) that represents the number of start information that is displayed by the number of start hold displays, The notice means performs the first notice notice by displaying the start hold display in a special display form different from the predetermined display form, and displays the start hold display display form displayed in the special display form. A game machine characterized in that the execution of the first notice is stopped by returning to the predetermined display mode based on the establishment of the predetermined opportunity. Is also explained.

  In addition, in the description so far, “the notice means performs the second notice notice at a timing (for example, a predetermined opportunity) different from the timing at which the first notice notice is started (for example, at the start opening prize). A game table that starts after the establishment of. Is also explained.

  For example, the hold change that is the first notice notification is the timing of the hold display, that is, the timing at which the game ball wins the start winning opening, but the second notice notice is a notice for the start information that is already displayed on hold. Therefore, it cannot be performed at the same timing as the timing of the first notice notification, and a variation of the notice notice can be given by intentionally performing the second notice notification at a different timing.

  Here, the notice means starts the first notice notice when the game ball enters the start area from which the predetermined start information is derived, and the first notice notice is provided. The second notice notification may be started with the predetermined trigger as a trigger that is different from the trigger for starting the notification.

  Further, the advance notice means may start the first advance notice at a start timing based on an entry timing of the game ball into the start area from which the predetermined start information is derived. Good.

  Further, in the description so far, the state change is possible between the first state in which it is difficult to win a game ball and the second state in which it is easier to win a game ball than the first state. A variable prize that keeps the first state in a state (for example, loss control state) and repeats a state change between the first state and the second state in the second control state (for example, hit control state). Provided with a device (for example, a variable start port 234), and the notification means is configured to display the second notification notification (for example, one shown in FIG. 23 (i)) during the second control state (for example, during a full game) A game stand characterized by performing a notice of character announcement) with a predetermined probability. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “the second prior notice notification is set to have a higher degree of reliability for deriving the specific determination result than the first prior notice information (for example, false A gaming table characterized by a low possibility of Is also explained.

  The notice notice described above may indicate that the result of the success / failure determination may be the specific determination result, and suggests to the player that this may be the case. May be. Further, it may be a prior notification that causes the player to expect that the result of the success / failure determination will be the specific determination result. Whether the result of the success / failure determination is the specific result of the success / failure determination for “representing a possibility”, “indicating to the player that there is a possibility”, or “making the player expect” Regardless of whether or not, a notification is made as if the result of the determination as to whether the result is the specific determination result, and the mode may be the same as the mode of the previous notification. For example, when the result of the determination is a pre-determination result that does not become the specific determination result, it may be a false notice that makes a false notification as if the specific determination result is the same. . Moreover, you may alert | report as if it becomes this specific success determination result, without determining beforehand whether the result of the said success determination becomes the said specific determination result. In addition, any of the notice means described so far may continuously perform the advance notification when the advance notification is started, or may perform the advance notification intermittently at a predetermined timing. There may be. Further, the expression “start notice notification” described above may be replaced with the expression “perform notice notice”, or conversely, the expression “perform notice notice” starts “notice notice notification”. It may be replaced with the expression "".

  In addition, “starting information deriving means for deriving starting information when a game ball enters a starting area (for example, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232) (for example, a random value generation circuit) 318, a special jackpot random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 for performing random number processing) and starting information derived by the starting information deriving means can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit number. Starting information storage means (for example, a special-purpose holding storage section provided in the RAM 308), starting information acquisition means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control section 300) for acquiring starting information from the starting information storage means, A validity determination means (for example, the main control unit 300 that executes a special drawing related lottery process) for determining the validity based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, and a predetermined activation signal (for example, A start signal (reset signal) output from the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 is input, and a game control means for starting game control based on the input of the predetermined start signal (for example, Main control unit 300) and an electric system abnormality signal output means (for example, voltage monitor) for outputting an electric system abnormality signal (for example, a low voltage signal) indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the game control means Circuit 338), game control information storage means (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for storing game control information when the electrical system abnormality signal is output, and the electrical system abnormality signal is output. Based on the fact that the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means later, the game control is brought into the control state when the electric system abnormality signal is output. Control state return means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) for returning based on information relating to game control stored in the information storage means, and the start information before the success / failure determination means makes a determination of success / failure. The start information pre-reading means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for pre-reading the start information stored in the storage means, and the correctness determination based on the predetermined start information stored in the start information storage means Prior to being performed by the determination means, the appropriateness determination means derives a specific success / failure determination result (for example, a jackpot success / failure determination result) based on the predetermined start information pre-read by the start information pre-read means. Based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the prior determination means. Prior notice means (e.g., first sub-control unit) that performs prior notice for making a prior notice that the failure determination means derives the specific determination result is performed before the validity determination means performs the determination. 400, the second sub-control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208) and a hold information notification (for example, hold display) indicating that the start information is stored in the start information storage means. A game table including an effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the advance notice means determines that the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means is the specific success / failure by the presence / absence determination means. When the determination result is a specific pre-determination result indicating that the determination result is derived, the hold information notification mode is changed to the first mode (for example, vertical stripe mode) with a predetermined first probability. Article advance When the result display means is a pre-determination result different from the specific pre-determination result, or the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means If the prior notice according to the first aspect is not performed according to the first probability even if the specific prior determination result is, a third aspect (for example, no pattern) different from the first aspect And the control state return means outputs the electrical system abnormality signal in a state where the hold information notification according to the first aspect is performed using the effect display means. Then, when the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means, the hold information report according to the first aspect, which has been performed using the effect display means until the electrical system abnormality signal is output. A gaming table, characterized in that those to be displayed on the 該演 out display means is switched to the suspension information notification by the third aspect. It may be.

  Also, “a specific activation signal (for example, a system reset signal) is input, and based on the input of the specific activation signal, the effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) displays an effect. Sub-control means (for example, the first sub-control section 400) for starting the production control for the game control means (for example, the main control section 300), the success / failure determination means, the start information pre-reading means, The preliminary control unit includes the preliminary control unit and the control state return unit, and receives a command signal (for example, a command) from the game control unit. Based on the received command signal, the holding information notification is performed by the effect display means, and the control state return means is the effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 20). ) To the game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) in a state in which the hold information notification (for example, the hold display) is performed according to the first aspect (for example, a vertical stripe form). Even if the activation signal is not input and the specific activation signal (for example, the system reset signal) is input to the sub-control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), the effect display means is used. The hold information notification according to the first mode that has been performed is switched to the hold information notification according to the third mode (for example, a non-patterned mode) and displayed on the effect display means. A game table. It may be.

  Further, “when a game ball enters the start area, start information deriving means for deriving start information (for example, a random number generation circuit 318, a random number counter for big hit special figure determination provided in the RAM 308, and random number processing) And a start information storage means capable of storing the start information derived by the start information deriving means up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, a special figure holding storage section provided in the RAM 308). Start information acquisition means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for acquiring start information from the start information storage means, and correctness determination means for making a determination of correctness based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means ( For example, the main control unit 300 that executes a special drawing related lottery process and a predetermined start signal (for example, a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340) And a game control means (for example, main control unit 300) for starting game control based on the input of the predetermined activation signal, and operating the game control means. An electrical system abnormality signal output means (for example, a voltage monitoring circuit 338) for outputting an electrical system abnormality signal (for example, a low voltage signal) indicating that there is an abnormality in the electrical system, and the electrical system abnormality signal is output In this case, a game control information storage unit (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) that stores information related to game control, and the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control unit after the electrical system abnormality signal is output. Based on information related to game control stored in the game control information storage means in the control state when the electrical system abnormality signal is output. Control information return means for returning (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) and start information destination for pre-reading the start information stored in the start information storage means before the success / failure determination means performs the determination of success / failure The start information prefetching is performed before the correctness determination based on the read means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the predetermined start information stored in the start information storage means is performed by the correctness determination means. Pre-determining means (for example, main control section) for pre-determining whether or not the appropriateness determining means derives a specific determination result (for example, jackpot determination result) based on the predetermined start information prefetched by the means 300) and the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means, it is determined in advance that the success / failure determination means derives the specific determination result. Prior notice means (for example, the first sub-control part 400, the second sub-control part 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208) that perform the prior notice for notification before the success / failure judgment part performs the judgment. And a display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) for performing holding information notification (for example, holding display) indicating that the starting information is stored in the starting information storage unit, and the game And a sub-control unit (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) different from the control unit, wherein the game control unit includes the success / failure determination unit, the start information pre-reading unit, and the front It has pre-article determination means, and the sub-control means has the advance notice means and the control state return means, and receives a command signal (for example, a command) from the game control means, Recieved Based on the command signal, the on-hold information notification is performed by the effect display means, and the advance notice means determines the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means by the validity determination means. When the result is a specific pre-determination result indicating that the result is derived, the above-described information is obtained by setting the hold information notification mode to the first mode (for example, vertical stripe mode) with a predetermined first probability. Pre-notice notification is performed, and the effect display unit is configured to perform a preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit when the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit is a preliminary determination result different from the specific preliminary determination result. Even if the result of the above is the specific prior determination result, when the advance notice according to the first aspect is not performed according to the first probability, a third aspect different from the first aspect (for example, Unpatterned The control information return means performs the hold information notification according to the first mode (for example, vertical stripe mode) using the effect display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). The electrical system abnormality signal (for example, a low voltage signal) is output in a state where (for example, hold display) is being performed, and then the predetermined activation signal is sent to the game control means (for example, the main control unit 300). When input, the hold information notification according to the first mode, which has been performed using the effect display means until the electrical system abnormality signal is output, is transmitted to the sub control means (for example, the first sub control section). 400) Even in a state where no abnormality has occurred in the electric system for operating, the display is switched to the on-hold information notification according to the third aspect (for example, a non-patterned aspect) and displayed on the effect display means. A game table characterized by being a thing. It may be. That is, “comprising sub-control means different from the game control means, wherein the game control means includes the success / failure determination means, the start information pre-reading means, and the pre-determination means, The advance notice means and the control state return means are provided, receive a command signal from the game control means, and based on the received command signal, notify the hold information notification to the effect display means. The control state return means outputs the electrical system abnormality signal in a state where the hold information notification according to the first aspect is performed using the effect display means, and then the predetermined state is output. When the activation signal is input to the game control means, the hold information notification according to the first aspect, which has been performed using the effect display means until the electrical system abnormality signal is output, Even if there is no abnormality in the electrical system for operating the stage, the game is characterized in that it is switched to the hold information notification according to the third aspect and displayed on the effect display means. Stand. It may be.

  In addition, “a sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) different from the game control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) is provided, and the sub-control unit receives a command signal from the game control unit ( For example, based on the received command signal (for example, command), the control for performing the presentation information for causing the presentation information means to perform the hold information notification, The control state return means, and an abnormal signal output means for monitoring whether or not the program for performing the production control is operating normally and outputting an abnormal signal when the program is operating abnormally (for example, WDT454), and the control state return means uses the effect display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) according to the first mode (for example, vertical stripe mode). In a state in which the hold information notification (for example, hold display) is being performed, the predetermined activation signal is not input to the game control means (for example, the main control unit 300), and the abnormal signal output means (for example, WDT 454). ), When the abnormal signal is output, the holding information notification according to the first aspect performed using the effect display means is performed according to the third aspect (for example, a non-patterned aspect). A game machine characterized by being switched to the hold information notification and displayed on the effect display means. It may be.

  The game control means includes sub-control means (for example, the first sub-control section 400) that is different from the game control means (for example, the main control section 300). A sub-control unit having the pre-notification unit and the control state return unit, the command signal from the game control unit (for example, command ) And on the basis of the received command signal, the on-hold information notification (for example, on-hold display) is performed on the effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and the game control means (for example, The main control unit 300) performs notification of the number of hold information indicating the number of the start information stored in the start information storage means (for example, the RAM 308) separately from the hold information notification. Gaming table to be. It may be.

  In addition, “the start area includes a first start area (for example, the first special figure start port 230) and a second start area (for example, the second special figure start) provided in the game area where the game ball can roll. The starting information storage means (for example, RAM 308) stores the starting information derived by the starting information deriving means up to a predetermined upper limit number when a game ball enters the first starting area. The first start information storage means (for example, the holding storage unit in FIG. 1) and the start information derived by the start information deriving means when a game ball enters the second start area Second start information storage means (for example, a holding storage unit in FIG. 2) capable of storing up to the upper limit number, and the start information prefetching means includes the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means Stored in at least one of the starting information storage means Amusement machine the starting information and said spruce determining means, characterized in that look-ahead before performing the propriety determination. It may be.

  In addition, “a symbol display means (for example, a decorative symbol display) that performs notification of the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means by stopping display of the symbol form corresponding to the result of the determination of appropriateness / inhibition after the symbol variation display is performed. Device 208) and the result corresponding to the specific determination result in the symbol display means when the determination result of the determination by the determination unit is the specific determination result (for example, the determination result of the big hit) The special game state in which a special game state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player is started after the symbol mode (for example, the combination of decorative symbols 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 5B) is stopped and displayed. And the symbol display means includes a case where the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is the specific success / failure determination result, and a result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means. It is configured so that reach effect display can be executed during the variation display of the symbol both in the case where the determination result is different from the determination result (for example, the result of determination of whether or not the game is lost). The means uses the start information used for the preliminary determination even if the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is a preliminary determination result different from the specific preliminary determination result (for example, a preliminary determination result of loss). When the reach effect display is performed during the display of the variation of the symbol at the time of notification of the result of the determination of success / failure based on the first mode (for example, the mode of the hold information notification (for example, the hold display)) with a predetermined probability. A gaming table characterized by performing the advance notice in the form of vertical stripes). It may be. The symbol display means may be effect display means.

  In addition, “a symbol display means (for example, a decorative symbol display) that performs notification of the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means by stopping display of the symbol form corresponding to the result of the determination of appropriateness / inhibition after the symbol variation display is performed. Device 208) and the result corresponding to the specific determination result in the symbol display means when the determination result of the determination by the determination unit is the specific determination result (for example, the determination result of the big hit) The special game state in which a special game state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player is started after the symbol mode (for example, the combination of decorative symbols 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 5B) is stopped and displayed. And the symbol display means includes a case where the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is the specific success / failure determination result, and a result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means. Reach effect display of the first reach mode (for example, the normal reach mode) during the display of the variation of the symbol both in the case of the determination result of the success / failure (eg, the result of determination of whether or not to lose) In addition to the reach effect display of the first reach mode from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the stop display of the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination The reach effect display of the second reach mode (for example, multi-line reach mode) is configured to be executable, and the probability that the symbol display unit executes the reach effect display of the second reach mode is determined as the success / failure determination. The result of the go / no-go decision by the go / no-go decision means is earlier than the case where the result of the go / no-go decision by the means is a different go / no-go decision result (for example, the result of the success / failure decision of the loss) It is set so as to be higher in the case of a specific success / failure determination result (for example, a jackpot success / failure determination result) (for example, the timer number determination table shown in FIG. 10). Even if the pre-determination result by the pre-article determination means is a pre-determination result (for example, the pre-determination result of the loss) that is different from the specific pre-determination result (for example, the jackpot prior determination result), Reach effect display in the second reach mode (for example, multi-line reach mode) during symbol variation display (for example, decorative symbol variation stop display) during notification of the result of the determination of success / failure based on the used start information Is performed, the advance notice notification is performed by setting the hold information notification mode (for example, hold display) to the first mode (for example, vertical stripe mode) with a predetermined probability. Game to play Stand. It may be.

  In addition, “the start area is a secondary start area provided in a game area in which a game ball can roll (for example, a normal start port 228), and a second start in which an open state of an entrance into which a game ball enters changes. Including a region (for example, the second special figure starting port 232), and the starting information storage means sets the starting information derived by the starting information deriving means to a predetermined upper limit number when a game ball enters the sub starting region. Sub-starting information storage means (for example, a conventional holding storage unit) that can store up to (for example, two) and a start derived by the start-up information deriving means when a game ball enters the second start area Second start information storage means (holding storage section in FIG. 2) capable of storing information up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and acquired from the sub start information storage means by the start information acquisition means Judgment on the basis of start information When the stage derives the specific success / failure determination result (a result of determination of success / failure per common figure), the open state of the entrance of the second start area is changed to a first open state (for example, a pair of game balls difficult to enter). Starting region changing means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for changing the state from a closed state of the blade member 2321 to a second open state where the game ball can easily enter (for example, a state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened). ), And when the success / failure determination means derives the specific success / failure determination result based on the start information acquired from the second start information storage means by the start information acquisition means, the first game ball is difficult to enter Variable winning means (for example, variable winning opening 234) for changing the ease of entry of the game ball from the variable state to the second variable state in which the game ball can easily enter, the start information prefetching means The above Amusement machine, characterized in that the second start information storage means and the advisability judging means the starting information stored on at least one of said secondary start information storage means is read ahead before performing the propriety determination. It may be.

  In addition, “the effect display means includes the first aspect (for example, vertical stripe aspect) and the third aspect (for example, no pattern) for each of all the start information stored in the start information storage means. The game table is characterized in that the hold information notification is performed according to one of a plurality of types of modes including the above-described mode. It may be.

  Further, “the advance notice means outputs the electric system abnormality signal (for example, low voltage signal), and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means (for example, the main control unit 300). Later, when the game ball newly enters the start area (for example, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232), the result of the pre-determination based on the start information derived is the specific determination result. In the case of a preliminary determination result (for example, a jackpot prior determination result), the mode of the hold information notification (for example, hold display) is set to the first mode (for example, vertical stripe mode) with a predetermined first probability. It may be a gaming machine characterized in that the advance notice is provided.

  Also, “a determination unit for determining whether or not to determine whether or not a predetermined determination result is satisfied (for example, the main control unit 300), and the result of the determination by the determination unit is a specific determination result (for example, a big hit). In some cases, the special advantage that the second advantage is higher than the first advantage from the normal gaming state (for example, the non-hit gaming state) where the advantage to the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300) for shifting the control state to a gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), an effect unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing an effect, and the special game Special gaming state information storage means (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) that stores special gaming state information (for example, the number of consecutive games) related to the state, and the special gaming state information storage means. Based on the special game state information that is present, any one type of effect among a plurality of types of effects including the first effect (for example, effect B) and the second effect (for example, effect C) is given to the effect unit. Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that performs control to be executed and a predetermined activation signal (for example, a reset signal) are input, and game control is performed based on the input of the predetermined activation signal. An electrical system abnormality that outputs an abnormal electric system signal (for example, a low voltage signal) indicating that there is an abnormality in the game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) to be started and the electric system for operating the game control means Signal output means (for example, voltage monitoring circuit 338) and game control information storage means (for example, RA of the main control unit 300) that stores information related to game control when the electrical system abnormality signal is output. 308), and when the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means after the electrical system abnormality signal is output, the game is brought into a control state when the electrical system abnormality signal is output. Control state return means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) for returning based on information related to game control stored in the control information storage means, and the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) Is based on the fact that the special game state information (for example, the number of consecutive resorts) stored in the special game state information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, twice or more). For example, the electric system abnormality signal is output in a state in which the effect unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is controlled to execute the effect C) and the second effect is being executed by the effect unit. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means, the second effect (for example, effect C) that has been executed in the effect unit until the electrical system abnormality signal is output. ) Is switched to the first effect (for example, effect B) and is caused to be executed by the effect unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). It may be.

  Here, in a game machine in which an effect that develops step by step by satisfying a predetermined condition from a start effect at the start of the effect to a second effect through the first effect, The first and second advantage is the advantage to the player when the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is a specific result of the success / failure determination when the determination result is true / false. Control state transition means for shifting the control state from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state that is the second advantage that is higher than the first advantage, an effect unit that can execute an effect, and the special Special game state information storage means for storing special game state information relating to the game state, and based on the special game state information stored in the special game state information storage means, the start effect, the first effect, and the First An effect control means for performing control for causing the effect unit to execute any one type of effect including a plurality of effects, a predetermined activation signal, and the predetermined activation signal being input Game control means for starting game control based on the above, an electric system abnormality signal output means for outputting an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the game control means, and the electric system abnormality Based on game control information storage means for storing information relating to game control when the signal is output, and when the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means after the electrical system abnormality signal is output. A control state return means for returning to the control state when the electrical system abnormality signal is output based on information relating to game control stored in the game control information storage means; The effect control means outputs the electrical system abnormality signal in a state where the predetermined effect developed from the start effect is being executed by the effect unit, and then the predetermined activation signal is the game control means. On the basis of the input to the stage, the predetermined effect, which has been executed in the effect unit until the electrical system abnormality signal is output, is switched to the effect of the stage before the previous stage of development into the predetermined effect. A game stand that is to be executed by the production section. It may be.

  Further, it may be provided with variable winning means for making a transition from a difficult winning state to an easy winning state based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning / non-winning means is a specific result. The variable winning means may repeat shifting from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state during the special game state.

  Further, the first effect and the second effect may be an effect having a story characteristic, and the second effect may be an effect subsequent to the story of the first effect.

  The second effect may be an effect that makes it easier to understand the contents of the effect when the first effect is viewed than when the first effect is not viewed.

  The effect unit may be an image display unit, and the first effect and the second effect may be an image effect.

  Further, the special game state information may be one or a plurality of pieces of information, and may be information related to the player's interest or may be information unrelated to the player's interest. The information related to the player's profit may be, for example, the number of derivations of the specific success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination unit, or the number of transitions from the difficult to win state to the easy to win state in the variable winning unit. More specifically, a probability variation state (for example, a probability variation state) in which a probability of deriving the specific success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination unit is higher than a probability non-variation state (a normal state, for example, an uncertain variation state), or / And the game table that makes the determination of success / failure based on the start information acquired when the game ball enters the start area, the game ball is more difficult than the entry difficult state (normal state, for example, non-electric support state) In the case where there are a plurality of types of the specific success / failure determination results, such as the number of derivations (for example, the number of consecutive resorts) of the specific success / failure determination result in the easy entry state (for example, the electric support state) that is easy to enter the start area Among the multiple types, the number of derivations that are advantageous to the player (for example, 15R big hit), the elapsed time since the transition to the special gaming state (for example, the cumulative number of rounds), the number of winning balls, the attacker The number of such release, and the like. That is, the special gaming state information may be information on a derivation history (big hit history) of the specific success / failure determination result. On the other hand, as information irrelevant to the player's profit, for example, information on whether or not a promotion condition for promotion from a current production to an advanced production has been satisfied (success or failure of promotion), Information on whether or not the demoting conditions that demote to the previous stage have been satisfied (success / failure of the demoted production), information on the selection of the production (selected mode, song), Information about the allies that appeared, information about the places they have advanced, etc.

  Further, the predetermined condition is that the number of derivations of the specific determination result by the determination unit, the number of transitions from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state in the variable winning unit is a predetermined number or more, It may be that a predetermined number has been reached. More specifically, the number of derivation times (for example, the number of consecutive resorts) of the specific success / failure determination result in the probability variation state (for example, the probability variation state) or / and the easy entry state (for example, the electric support state) When there are a plurality of types of specific success / failure determination results, the derivation number (for example, 15R big hit), the number of prize balls, and the number of attackers released that are advantageous to the player among the plurality of types are more than a predetermined number. Or a predetermined number may be reached. Further, the elapsed period (for example, the cumulative number of rounds) after the transition to the special gaming state may be a predetermined period or more, or a predetermined period may be reached.

  In addition, “the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is configured such that the special game state information (for example, the number of consecutive games) stored in the special game state information storage means has a predetermined condition (for example, twice). Based on satisfying the above, the second effect (for example, effect C) is applied to the effect part (for example, a decorative symbol display device) during a predetermined period in the special game state (for example, the big hit game state). 208) A game table characterized by performing control to be executed. It may be.

  The predetermined period in the special gaming state may be, for example, a partial period of the jackpot start effect, the jackpot end effect, the round start effect, the effect during the predetermined round, or the entire period. .

  In addition, “the control state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300) determines that the first special gaming state (when the determination result of the determination by the determination unit is a specific determination result (for example, a big hit)) For example, a plurality of types of special games including a 2R jackpot game state) and a second special game state having a higher advantage for the player than the first special game state (eg, 15R jackpot game state). The control state is shifted to one type of special game state among the states, and the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is a special game stored in the special game state information storage means. Based on the fact that the state information satisfies a predetermined condition, a predetermined period (for example, a period after the second consecutive game) in the second special gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state of 15R jackpot) Second effect (e.g., effect C) the presentation unit (e.g., decorative pattern display unit 208) performs control to execute, amusement machine, characterized in that. It may be.

  The second special game state may be a big hit game state with a probable big hit or a big hit game state with a 15R big hit, and the predetermined condition includes, for example, a condition of acquiring a big hit of the fifth consecutive resort.

  In addition, “the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) indicates that the special game state information (for example, the number of consecutive games) stored in the special game state information storage means has a predetermined condition (for example, 2 The second effect (for example, effect C) is executed on the effect part (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) with a higher probability than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. A game table characterized by performing control. It may be.

  For example, the probability that the second effect will be executed increases in a big hit after 5 consecutive villas.

  The high probability mentioned here may be a probability larger than 0%, for example, 0.1% or 100%.

  In addition, “the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is a third effect that is not based on the special game state information (for example, the number of consecutive games) stored in the special game state information storage means ( For example, the control is also performed to cause the effect unit to execute an effect for displaying a power recovery default screen, and the second effect (for example, effect C) is being executed by the effect unit. Based on the fact that a system abnormality signal is output and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means, the second part that has been executed in the effect section until the electrical system abnormality signal is output An effect (for example, effect C) is switched to the third effect (for example, an effect to display a default screen for power recovery) and executed by the effect unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). That features Gaming table to be. It may be.

  Examples of the third effect include “preparing” image display and single color image display. The third effect may be an effect having the same content as the start effect, which is not based on the special game state information (for example, a jackpot history).

  The control state return means outputs the electrical system abnormality signal in a state where a predetermined effect developed from the start effect is being executed by the effect unit, and then inputs the predetermined start signal to the game control means. Based on the above, before the predetermined effect, which has been executed in the effect unit until the electrical system abnormality signal is output, is switched to the third effect and then developed into the predetermined effect. You may make it switch to the production of the stage before a stage, and make this production part perform.

  In addition, “the special game state information storage unit (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) is used as the special game state information by the above-described determination unit (for example, the main control unit 300) for the specific determination result. The number of derivations (for example, the number of consecutive games) from which (for example, the big hit) is derived is stored, and the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is stored in the special game state information storage means. The number of times representing the number of times of derivation is controlled to be displayed on the effect section, and the number of times representing the first number of times (for example, 5 times) (for example, a character display of “5 consecutive characters”) is displayed. Based on the fact that the electrical system abnormality signal is output while being displayed on the effect section (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means. The number of times displayed on the effect unit until the electrical system abnormality signal is output (for example, the character display of “5 consecutive villains”) is more than the first number of times (for example, 5 times). The display is switched to a number display (for example, a character display of “1 consecutive sword”) representing a small second number (for example, 1 time) and displayed on the effect section (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). A game stand characterized by that. It may be.

  The number display may be a display by characters or a display by the number of symbols or figures. The second number of times may be zero.

  Furthermore, “a number display unit (for example, a 7-segment display device) that displays the number of times separately from the effect unit is provided, and the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) displays the number of times display. The number of times display (for example, a character display of “5 consecutive characters”) that controls the number of times to be displayed on the number of times display unit (for example, 7 segment display device) and represents the first number of times (for example, 5 times) is Based on the fact that the electrical system abnormality signal is output in a state where it is displayed on the number display section (for example, a 7-segment display device), and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means, The number of times displayed on the number of times display section until the system abnormality signal is output (for example, a character display of “5 consecutive villains”) is less than the first number of times (for example, 5 times). 2 times (for example, once Count display indicating (e.g., character display of "series 1 Zhuang th") gaming table, wherein 該回 number display unit is switched to (e.g., 7-segment display device) is intended to be displayed on it. It may be.

  Here, “the determination of whether or not to determine whether or not a predetermined determination result is satisfied, and the result of the determination by the determination unit is a specific determination result. Control state transition means for shifting the control state from the normal gaming state that is one advantage to the special gaming state that is the second advantage that is higher than the first advantage, and the execution is executable The production unit, the special game state information storage means for storing the special game state information relating to the special game state, and the special game state information stored in the special game state information storage means satisfy the first condition. If the special game state information satisfies the first condition and also satisfies the second condition, the first effect is performed. Production control hand that performs control to be executed by the club A predetermined activation signal is input, and a game control means for starting game control based on the input of the predetermined activation signal and an electrical system for operating the game control means are abnormal. An electric system abnormality signal output means for outputting an electric system abnormality signal, a game control information storage means for storing information relating to game control when the electric system abnormality signal is output, and the electric system abnormality signal is output. The game control information stored in the game control information storage means in the control state when the electrical system abnormality signal is output based on the fact that the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means And a control state return means for returning based on the information, wherein the effect control means is configured to output the power in a state where the second effect is being executed by the effect unit. Based on the fact that a system abnormality signal is output and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means, the second part that has been executed in the effect section until the electrical system abnormality signal is output A game machine characterized in that the production is switched to the first production and is caused to be executed by the production unit. It may be.

  The second condition may be a condition imposed when the first condition is satisfied.

  In addition, “in a gaming table included in a gaming area (for example, gaming area 124) in which a gaming ball can roll, the target area to be aimed by the player is changed based on the operation by the player. Launching means (e.g., launching device 110) that launches toward the target; suggesting means (e.g., decorative symbol display device 208) that performs area suggestion (e.g., hitting suggestion) that suggests information about the target area; A first suggestion mode (eg, “Left Strike”) that suggests to the player that the game ball is to be fired toward a first target area (eg, the left area), and a second target area (eg, Any one of a plurality of suggested modes including a second suggested mode that suggests to the player that the game ball is to be fired toward In front, aspect Suggestion control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that performs control for causing the suggestion means to execute the region suggestion and a predetermined activation signal (for example, a reset signal) are input, and the predetermined activation signal is input Based on the above, a game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for starting the game control and an electric system abnormality signal (for example, a low voltage signal) indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the game control means ) For outputting an electrical system abnormality signal (for example, a voltage monitoring circuit 338) and a game control information storage unit (for example, a main control unit) for storing information related to game control when the electrical system abnormality signal is output. 300 308), and when the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means after the electrical system abnormality signal is output, Control state return means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for returning to the control state at the time of output based on information relating to game control stored in the game control information storage means, The suggestion control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is configured such that the area suggestion (for example, how to hit) suggests the suggestion means (for example, a decorative pattern) according to a predetermined suggestion mode (for example, “please make a left strike”). The electrical system abnormality signal is output in a state where it is executed on the display device 208), and then the electrical system abnormality signal is output based on the predetermined activation signal being input to the game control means. The region suggestion by the predetermined suggestion mode (for example, “please left-handed”) that has been executed by the suggestion means is different from the predetermined suggestion mode among the plurality of types of suggestion modes A game table characterized by switching to an suggestion mode (for example, “right-turn”) and causing the suggestion means to execute. It may be.

  The target area may be the right area of the game area, the left area, or the entire area. The second target area may be an area including the first target area, or may be an area not including the first target area.

  The suggestion control means outputs the electrical system abnormality signal in a state where the suggestion means is executed by the suggestion means according to the second suggestion mode, and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means. Based on the above, the area suggestion according to the second suggestion mode, which has been executed by the suggestion unit until the electrical system abnormality signal is output, is switched to the area suggestion according to the first suggestion mode and executed by the suggestion unit. You may make it.

  The first target area mentioned here may be an area larger than the second target area (for example, the entire area), or the first target area separated from the second target area (for example, the right area). An area having the same size as the second target area (for example, the left area) may be used.

  In this gaming machine, the target area may change depending on the progress of the game and the control state (game state).

  The firing means may be a handle or the like.

  The target area may be the area on the right side of the center accessory, the area on the left side, etc., may be an area where a specific starting port is arranged, or may be a specific big prize It may be a region where the mouth is arranged.

  The suggestion means may be a display means such as a liquid crystal display panel or a lamp, or may be a sound output means such as a speaker.

  The first suggestion mode may be, for example, a character display mode that should be left-handed, and the second suggestion mode may be a character display mode that should be right-handed. In addition, the first suggestion mode may be a mode that suggests that the entire region is aimed at by not displaying anything, or a mode that suggests aiming at the left region that is the normal target region without displaying anything. The second suggestion mode may be a mode that suggests aiming at the left region by character display.

  In addition, “the suggestion control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) suggests to the player a first target area aim for firing a game ball toward the first target area (for example, the left area). In addition to one suggestion mode (for example, “left-handed” character display), the player may aim for the first target area in a third suggestion mode (for example, a default suggestion mode) different from the first suggestion mode. A game table characterized by performing control to cause the suggestion means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) to execute the suggestion of the region (for example, suggestion of how to hit). It may be.

  For example, if the first target area is aimed at the left area, that is, left-handed, the first suggesting aspect is a character display aspect of returning to left-handed. The suggestion aspect may be an aspect that suggests left-handed without displaying anything.

  In addition, “the suggestion control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) moves the game ball toward the target area according to the current control state (for example, big hit gaming state, electric support state, non-electric support state). A game stand characterized by performing control to cause the suggestion means to execute the region suggestion in any one of a plurality of suggestion modes including a suggestion mode that suggests to the player to launch . It may be.

  For example, in a game stand that advances a game with left-handed in a normal gaming state, the plurality of types of suggestions may include a suggestion mode (for example, a first suggestion mode) that suggests left-handed. .

  Further, “starting information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting area (for example, the first special figure starting port 230) and when the game ball enters the second starting area (for example, the second special figure starting port 232). A determination unit (for example, the main control unit 300) for determining whether or not the game ball is based on, a difficult-to-enter control state (for example, a non-electric support state) in which the game ball is unlikely to enter the second start area, and the difficult-to-enter control Entry state transition control means (for example, the main control unit 300) that shifts the control state between the easy entry control state (for example, the electric support state) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting area than the state; And the suggestion control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) shifts from the easy entry control state (for example, electric support state) to the difficult entry control state (for example, non-electric support state). Predetermined period (for example, symbol variation table Is a first suggestion that suggests to the player that a game ball is to be fired toward the first starting area (for example, the first special figure starting port 230) as the first target area. Control is performed to cause the suggestion means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) to execute the region suggestion (for example, suggestion of how to hit) in a mode (for example, a character display of “please make a left strike”). To play. It may be.

  The suggestion control means is a second suggestion mode that suggests to the player that a game ball is to be fired toward the second starting area as the second target area in the easy approach control state, and the suggestion means includes the suggestion means You may perform control which performs an area | region suggestion.

  Here, “a probability variation state (for example, a non-probability variation state) and a probability variation state (for example, a probability variation state) in which the probability of deriving a specific success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination unit is higher than the probability non-variation state. The suggestion control means shifts from the easy-to-enter control state (for example, the electric support state) to the difficult-to-enter control state (for example, the non-electric support state). The period of the probability variation state is a first suggestion mode that suggests to the player a first start area aiming at launching a game ball toward the first start area as the first target area. A third suggestion mode that suggests to the player the aim of the first start area, which is different from the first suggestion mode in the difficult-to-enter control state and the probability non-variable state. And the suggestion Amusement machine, characterized in that the step wherein performs control to execute the region suggested. It may be.

  The aim of the first starting area here is, for example, aiming at the left area, that is, left-handed. The three suggestion modes may be modes that suggest left-handed without displaying anything.

  The suggestion control means is a first suggestion mode that suggests to the player that a game ball is to be launched toward the first start area as the first target area in the difficult-to-enter control state. In a second suggestion mode that performs control to execute the region suggestion, and suggests to the player that a game ball is to be launched toward the second start region as the second target region in the easy approach control state, Control that causes the suggestion means to execute the region suggestion may be performed.

  Furthermore, “when the game ball enters the first start area, first start information storage means capable of storing the first start information up to a predetermined upper limit number, and when the game ball enters the second start area, Second start information storage means capable of storing two start information up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the success / failure determination means includes both the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means. If the start information is stored in the second start information storage means, a determination is made based on the start information stored in the second start information storage means, the first start information storage means and the second start information When starting information is stored in one of the storage means, the determination is made based on the starting information stored in the starting information storage means in which the starting information is stored. To play. It may be.

  This can be applied to the second start area priority machine, and when applied to the second start area priority machine, the predetermined period may be a period for digesting the priority side start information. .

  The predetermined period may be a predetermined period length, or may be a period length that changes according to a control state (game state).

  In addition, “the suggestion control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is an area that does not correspond to the current control state (for example, the non-electric support state) in the gaming area (for example, the gaming area 124). The game ball is fired toward the target area (for example, the left area) corresponding to the current control state based on the game ball having entered (for example, the game ball has entered the normal opening 228). In a suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode) that suggests to the player, control is performed to cause the suggestion means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) to execute the region suggestion (for example, how to hit the game). A characteristic game stand. It may be.

  Of the game area, the area that does not correspond to the current control state is, for example, the right area in the control state that should be left-handed.

  The case where a game ball has entered includes, for example, a case where a sensor such as a usual gate detects a game ball.

  Also, “a determination unit for determining whether or not to determine whether or not a predetermined determination result is satisfied (for example, the main control unit 300), and a result of the determination by the determination unit is a specific determination result (for example, a big hit). The second advantage is higher than the first advantage from the normal gaming state (eg, non-hit gaming state) where the advantage to the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, main control unit 300) for shifting the control state to a special game state (for example, big hit game state), the suggestion control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), A predetermined period (for example, symbol) after the control state transition means (for example, main control unit 300) shifts from the special gaming state (for example, big hit gaming state) to the normal gaming state (for example, non-big hit gaming state). The period in which the dynamic display is performed four times) indicates to the player that a game ball is to be launched toward the first starting area (for example, the first special figure starting port 230) as the first target area. Performing control to cause the suggestion means (for example, the decorative design display device 208) to execute the region suggestion (for example, suggestion of how to hit) in one suggestion mode (for example, a character display of “please place left”). A characteristic game stand. It may be.

  Here, “it includes variable winning means for shifting from a difficult-to-win state to an easy-to-win state based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning / non-winning means is a specific winning / failing determination result. A game machine characterized by repeatedly shifting from a difficult-to-win state to an easy-to-win state during a state. It may be.

  For example, in a special gaming state (for example, during a big hit game), a right-handed game machine or in a normal game state (for example, during a non-big hit game), or a left-handed game table in a big hit game, or a right hit game without electric support. After the end (non-electricity support support state in which the non-electric support state is an example), it may be a left-handed game machine.

  The predetermined period referred to here may be, for example, a period during which the special symbol display is performed a predetermined number of times, or a predetermined period length.

  Further, “the suggestion control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is configured such that the control state transition unit (for example, the main control unit 300) is changed from the normal gaming state (for example, non-big hit gaming state) to the special gaming state. (For example, a period from the start of the big hit game to immediately before the end effect of the big hit game is performed) after the transition to the big hit game state, the second target area is the second target area. The suggestion means in a second suggestion mode (for example, a character indication “please hit right”) that suggests to the player that a game ball is to be launched toward the start area (for example, the second special figure start port 232) A game table characterized by performing control for causing the area suggestion (for example, hitting suggestion) to be executed (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208). It may be.

  The predetermined period here may be, for example, a partial period of the big hit start effect.

  The suggestion control means may launch a game ball toward the second start area as the second target area also immediately before the control state transition means shifts from the normal game state to the special game state. You may perform control which performs the suggestion of the information regarding the said target area | region to the said suggestion means by the 2nd suggestion aspect suggested to a player.

  In addition, “the game table characterized in that the suggesting means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is a display means for displaying the region suggestion. It may be.

In addition, in "a game stand where different types of effects are performed by each of a plurality of direction units,
When it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination condition is met, whether or not the determination is correct (for example, the main control unit 300), and the determination result is a specific determination result (for example, a big hit). In addition, the special gaming state in which the advantage is higher than the first advantage from the normal gaming state (for example, non-big hit gaming state) in which the advantage to the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, main control unit 300) that shifts the control state to (for example, big hit game state) and a first effect unit (for example, ball effect device 207) that can execute a ball effect using a game ball A second effect unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined type of effect (for example, an image display effect) different from the type of the ball effect, and the second type of effect to the second effect Let it be performed in the production department Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that performs control to cause the first production unit to execute a predetermined ball production when the control and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, when entering the eighth round) And a game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for starting game control based on the input of a predetermined activation signal (for example, a reset signal) and the input of the predetermined activation signal, and the game control An electric system abnormality signal output means (for example, a voltage monitoring circuit 338) for outputting an electric system abnormality signal (for example, a low voltage signal) indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the means, and the electric system abnormality signal Is output, the game control information storage means (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for storing information related to the game control, and before the electrical system abnormality signal is output Based on information relating to game control stored in the game control information storage means in a control state when the electrical system abnormality signal is output based on the input of a predetermined activation signal to the game control means. Control state return means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) for returning, and the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), the predetermined ball effect is the first effect unit ( For example, the electric system abnormality signal is output based on the fact that the electric system abnormality signal is output while being executed by the ball effect device 207) and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means. The predetermined effect produced in the first effect part (for example, the ball effect device 207) until the output is output, and the predetermined type effect in the second effect unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). (example For example, an image display effect) to be executed by the second effect unit. It may be.

  The effect control means outputs the electric system abnormality signal in a state where the predetermined ball effect is being executed by the first effect unit, and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means. The predetermined ball effect that was executed in the first effect unit is canceled until the electric system abnormality signal is output. After switching, the game ball may remain in the first effect section.

  The ball effect using a game ball here may be an effect using a so-called out ball (dead ball), or a ball that circulates inside a game table or a game ball that has entered a specific area is used. It may be a production.

  The second rendering unit may be a liquid crystal display panel, a display unit such as a lamp, or a sound output unit such as a speaker. That is, it is possible to execute a type of effect that does not use a game ball.

  Examples of the predetermined condition include arrival of a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of a predetermined round) during a special gaming state (for example, during a big hit game). The first effect section has a specific area (for example, V zone) into which a game ball can enter, and in a predetermined ball effect, it is determined that a predetermined profit is given when the game ball enters the specific area (for example, , An effect suggesting that the probability change or 15R has been confirmed) is performed.

  Here, “the symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure after the symbol variation display is performed, and the symbol for determining the symbol variation period to be the symbol variation display period in the symbol display means” A game machine comprising a variable period determining means. It may be.

  According to this gaming machine, the predetermined condition includes the arrival of a predetermined timing during the symbol variation period (for example, at the start of symbol variation). In the predetermined ball effect, when the game ball enters the specific area (for example, the V zone), an effect suggesting that the predetermined effect (for example, SP reach development) will be performed, When entering the region (V zone), an effect is performed that suggests that a predetermined profit is confirmed (for example, jackpot decision, probability change jackpot decision).

  In addition, “the first effect section (for example, the ball effect device 207) has a specific area (for example, the V zone 2071v) into which a game ball can enter, and the effect control unit is configured to perform the predetermined ball effect during the predetermined ball effect. When the game ball enters the specific area, the second effect unit performs a specific effect (for example, effect D), and the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) Based on the fact that the electric system abnormality signal is output in a state where a predetermined ball effect is being executed by the first effect unit, and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means, the electric system The specific effect (for example, effect D) in the second effect unit is the predetermined effect that has been executed in the first effect unit (for example, the ball effect device 207) until an abnormal signal is output. Different non-specific effects (for example, effects Switch to) those to be executed by the said second rendering unit, amusement machine, characterized in that. It may be.

  Examples of the specific effect include an effect that suggests certainty change confirmation, an effect that suggests that the jackpot is 15R, and an effect that suggests a jackpot.

In addition, “the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) performs an effect having contents not related to the predetermined ball effect (for example, the same effect as the default effect of effect A) as the non-specific effect. Control to be executed by the second rendering unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208);
A game stand characterized by that. It may be.

  Here, for example, an effect having contents not related to the predetermined ball effect is an effect dedicated to the predetermined effect.

  In addition, “the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) performs the predetermined effect on the first effect unit when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when it enters the eighth round). (For example, the ball effect device 207) performs control to be executed, and the second effect unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) displays the effect related to the predetermined ball effect (for example, the effect corresponding to the ball effect). A game machine characterized by performing control to be executed in the game. It may be.

  The effect of the content related to the predetermined ball effect here is, for example, an effect suggesting that the probability change will be confirmed when the game ball enters the specific area, and an effect suggesting that the big hit is 15 rounds. The production suggests a big hit.

  In addition, “the game stage characterized in that the second effect section (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is display means for displaying an effect different from the ball effect. It may be.

  Here, in the game table where different types of effects are performed by each of the plurality of effect units, the determination result determination unit for determining whether or not the predetermined determination result is satisfied, and the result of the determination of the success / failure by the determination unit. In the case of a specific success / failure determination result, the special gaming state in which the advantage is higher than the first advantage from the normal gaming state in which the advantage to the player is the first advantage. A control state transition means for transitioning the control state, a first effect unit capable of executing a ball effect using a game ball, and a second effect unit capable of executing a predetermined type of effect different from the type of the ball effect; A control unit for executing a predetermined type of effect in the first effect unit; and an effect control means for performing a control for executing a predetermined ball effect in the second effect unit when a predetermined condition is satisfied; and a predetermined activation signal. Input, the predetermined A game control means for starting game control based on the input of an activation signal, and an electric system abnormality signal output for outputting an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the game control means And a game control information storage means for storing information relating to game control when the electrical system abnormality signal is output, and the predetermined activation signal is output to the game control means after the electrical system abnormality signal is output. Control state return means for returning to the control state when the electrical system abnormality signal is output based on the information inputted, based on information relating to game control stored in the game control information storage means; The second production unit executes a stage production that progresses step by step from the start production when the production is started, and responds to the ball production according to the situation of the predetermined ball production Output as a stage effect in the middle of the stage effect, the effect control means, the electric system abnormality signal is in the state that the ball effect corresponding effect is being executed in the second effect unit Based on the fact that the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means, the ball effect corresponding effect that has been executed in the second effect unit until the electric system abnormality signal is output is output. The game table is characterized in that the second stage is executed by switching to the stage of the stage before the predetermined stage. It may be.

  The effect control means performs a predetermined ball effect in the first effect section that has been performed until the electrical system abnormality signal is output based on the input of the predetermined activation signal to the game control means. You may stop or continue. Moreover, the aspect which the ball | bowl used by the predetermined | prescribed ball | bowl production performed until then may remain in a 1st production | presentation part for a predetermined period.

  In addition, “a determination unit (for example, the main control unit 300) for determining whether or not the determination is made when a predetermined determination criterion is established, and after the symbols are variably displayed, the design corresponding to the result of the determination is stopped. The symbol display unit (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214) that performs a series of symbol variation display from the start to the stop display of the symbol variation display to be displayed, and the success / failure by the determination unit When the determination result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, big hit), the first advantage from the normal gaming state (for example, non-hit gaming state) in which the advantage for the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300) that shifts the control state to the special gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state) that is the second advantage having the higher advantage, and the effect display that can display the effect (For example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and a first specific effect display (for example, effect A) that can be executed during a period in which the effect display unit performs the symbol variation display a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), And any one type of effect display among a plurality of types of effect display including a second specific effect display (for example, effect B) different from the first specific effect display, An effect display control means (for example, the first sub-control part 400) that performs control to be executed by the effect display unit when a big hit is made and the random number lottery is established, and a predetermined activation signal (for example, a reset signal) Is input, and there is an abnormality in the game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for starting the game control based on the input of the predetermined activation signal and the electric system for operating the game control means Represents An electric system abnormality signal output means (for example, a voltage monitoring circuit 338) that outputs an air system abnormality signal (for example, a low voltage signal), and a game that stores information related to game control when the electric system abnormality signal is output Based on the control information storage means (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) and the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means after the electrical system abnormality signal is output, the electrical system abnormality signal Control state return means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) for returning to the control state at the time of output based on information related to game control stored in the game control information storage means The effect display control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400) is the first specific effect display by the effect display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). The electrical system abnormality signal (for example, a low voltage signal) is output in a state where (for example, production A) is being performed, and then the predetermined activation signal (for example, a reset signal) is input to the game control means. On the basis of this, the first specific effect display that has been performed on the effect display unit until the electrical system abnormality signal is output is switched to the second specific effect display (for example, effect B), and A game stand characterized by being executed by an effect display unit. It may be.

  The predetermined number of times may be one time or a plurality of times.

  The effect display control means includes a plurality of types including a first specific effect display in which an effect is performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, and a second specific effect display in which the effect ends during one symbol variation display. Control that causes the effect display unit to execute any one kind of effect display from among the effect displays when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be performed.

  A starting information deriving means for deriving starting information when the game ball enters the starting area; a starting information storing means capable of storing the starting information derived by the starting information deriving means up to a predetermined upper limit; Start information acquisition means for acquiring start information from the start information storage means, correctness determination means for determining correctness based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, and before the correctness determination means performs correctness determination In addition, the start information prefetching means for prefetching the start information stored in the start information storage means, and the correctness determination based on the predetermined start information stored in the start information storage means are performed by the correctness determination means. Before that, whether or not the appropriateness determination means derives a specific determination result based on the predetermined start information pre-read by the start information pre-read means In the case of amusement machine having a pre-judging means for the constant, a is the first specific effect display may be those in based effect is performed prior determination result by the pre-determination means.

  Further, based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means, the advance determination notification is made for the advance determination notification for the advance determination notice to be derived by the success determination means to derive the specific determination result. In the case of a gaming machine provided with a prior notice means that is performed prior to performing, the first specific effect display may be the prior notice notification.

  The predetermined number of times may be the predetermined upper limit number (maximum holding number).

  In addition, the control state is shifted between a difficult-to-enter control state in which a game ball is unlikely to enter a predetermined start-up area and an easy-to-enter control state in which a game ball is likely to enter the predetermined start-up area. An approach state transition control means, a probability non-change state (for example, a non-probability change state), and a probability change state (for example, a derivation probability of a specific success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination means higher than the probability non-change state) And a state transition control means for shifting the control state between the probability variation state and the probability variation state after the symbol variation display is executed a first number of times in the probability variation state and the easy entry state. And when the symbol variation display is executed a second number of times in the difficult-to-enter state, the ST has a ST mode that shifts to the non-probable state and the difficult-to-enter state. Number of times and the second Number obtained by summing the number of times (e.g., ST number) may be used.

  Further, the predetermined number of times may be a number related to a control state (game state). For example, it may be the number of symbol variation displays executed in the easy entry state (for example, electric support number), and the number of symbol variation displays executed in the probability variation state and the entry difficult state. May be. On the contrary, the predetermined number of times may be a number not related to the control state (game state), for example, 10 times.

  The first specific effect display may be a series or related effect display. The series or related effect display here indicates that, for example, a specific success / failure determination result (for example, jackpot) is included in the hold immediately after the end of the special game state (for example, jackpot game state). An effect (for example, special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability) in the last symbol variation display of the second variation (for example, four times) of the symbol variation display in the ST mode in the above-mentioned ST mode 1 effect of crying in the state), an effect based on the start information pre-read by the start information pre-reading means (effect based on the result of the prior determination), and the control state, for example, Even if it is an effect performed in the time corresponding to 10 times of symbol variation display or a judgment effect that suggests or informs the current true gaming state (an effect in the predetermined symbol variation display after the end of the special gaming state) There. Production contents include stage production contents that progress in stages (for example, stage production contents that progress each time one or more symbol variation displays are performed), and stage contents that repeat substantially the same stage production (for example, It may be the effect content repeated in the four symbol variation display).

  The second specific effect display may be an effect display different from the first specific effect display. For example, when the first specific effect display is a series or related effect display, The specific effect display may be an effect display in a default manner corresponding to the gaming state (more specifically, the same effect as the effect after the first specific effect display is finished).

In addition, “the effect display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) displays the result indicating the information related to the player's interest as the first specific effect display (for example, effect A) (for example, As the second specific effect display (for example, effect B), the effect display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is controlled to perform an effect display including that the current control state is a certain change state). , Control for causing the effect display unit to execute an effect display that does not include the result display (for example, the current control state is a certain change state) by the first specific effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. It may be.

  The result display that suggests information relating to the player's interest is, for example, a display that suggests that the success / failure determination unit has determined to derive the specific success / failure determination result, or the probability variation state. It may be a display that suggests that the transition is confirmed, or a display that suggests that the probability variation state is currently guaranteed.

  For example, the first specific effect display is a display that suggests that it is currently guaranteed that the probability variation state is present, and the second specific effect display is determined by the determination of whether or not the specific determination is correct. If it is a display suggesting that it is determined that the result is to be derived, if the power is interrupted / recovered during the first specific effect display, information on the current control state cannot be obtained.

  In addition, “the effect display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) causes the first specific effect display (for example, effect A) to be performed on the effect display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). At this time, predetermined number information (for example, countdown display) whose count value is changed at a predetermined timing in the symbol variation display (for example, start timing of symbol variation display) is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). ) Or a display unit (for example, a dedicated 7-segment display device) different from the effect display unit, and the first specific effect display (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). , Based on the fact that the electrical system abnormality signal is output in the state where the effect A) is performed, and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means, The display of the number information (for example, twice) displayed on the effect display unit or the display unit different from the effect display unit until the electrical system abnormality signal is output is different from the display of the number information ( For example, a game table that is switched to 4 times. It may be.

  When the first specific effect display is performed on the effect display unit, the effect display control unit is configured to subtract or add predetermined number information to be added or subtracted at the start or end of the symbol variation display. A mode of displaying on a display unit different from the display unit may be used.

  The predetermined number information referred to here is the number of symbol variation displays (for example, the number of remaining symbol variation displays in the ST mode) performed before the end of the predetermined control state or the symbol variation display. It may be the number of times of remaining symbol variation display in the continuous production. Further, it may be a concept representing a number including figures and symbols other than the number itself (for example, if four predetermined symbols are displayed, the remaining four times are indicated).

  The display unit different from the effect display unit may be, for example, a 7-segment display device.

  Examples of the display different from the display of the number information include blinking display of “−” and “”, display of “” and “−”, and numerical information that is larger or smaller than that before the power failure recovery. It may be a display. That is, the display different from the display of the number information includes a patternless and one-color display and a display in which nothing is represented.

  The effect display control means performs control to cause the effect display unit to display predetermined number information as the first specific effect display, and the display of the number information as the second specific effect display. The aspect which performs control which makes this display to perform a different display may be sufficient. In this aspect, the effect display unit may be a 7-segment display device.

  In addition, “the effect display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) starts the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214). At the same time, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed to stop displaying the symbol pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result in accordance with the stop display of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit. While the effect display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is controlled to execute and the first specific effect display (for example, effect A) is being performed on the effect display unit, the first display mode Control is performed to cause the effect display unit to execute the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol (for example, the display mode in the upper right small area), and the second specific effect display (for example, effect C) is performed on the effect display unit. While the image is being displayed, control is performed to cause the effect display unit to execute a design variation display of the decorative pattern in a second display mode (for example, a display mode in the central area) different from the first display mode. A characteristic game stand. It may be.

  The symbol display unit and the effect display unit may be common display means.

  Moreover, as a 2nd display mode different from a 1st display mode, compared with the decoration pattern in a 1st display mode, for example, a mode with which size differs (for example, small), and a color shade are different (for example, It may be a mode in which the displayed position is different (for example, the first display mode is displayed in the center while the second display mode is displayed in the upper right).

  The first display mode is a mode in which the content of at least one of the display color shading, size, and display position of the decorative design is determined, and the second display mode is the first display mode. The aspect which changed the content of the display requirement determined by the display mode of may be sufficient.

  Further, “when a game ball enters the start area, start information deriving means for deriving start information (for example, a random number generation circuit 318, a random number counter for big hit special figure determination provided in the RAM 308, and random number processing) And a start information storage means (for example, a special map provided in the RAM 308) capable of storing the start information derived by the start information deriving means up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). The hold storage unit), the start information acquisition unit (for example, the main control unit 300) for acquiring start information from the start information storage unit, and the right / no-go determination based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition unit Determination means (for example, the main control unit 300), and the effect display control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is start information stored in the start information storage unit. Starting information number display control (for example, display 2180, 2200 of the number of holdings) is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, decorative symbol display device 208), or display information number display control is performed to hide the effect information display. While the first specific effect display (for example, effect A) is being performed in the section, the start information number display control is performed by the first control mode (for example, the control mode to be hidden), and the effect display While the second specific effect display (for example, effect B) is being performed at the part, the second control mode (for example, the control for performing the display 2180, 2200 of the number of holdings) is different from the first control mode. A game machine characterized by performing start information number display control according to the aspect. It may be.

  For example, the first control mode may be a mode in which the start information number display is not displayed, whereas the second control mode may be a mode in which the start information number display is displayed. .

  Alternatively, the second control mode may be a mode in which the start information number display is displayed over a long period of time as compared to the first control mode. That is, the first control mode is set to a mode in which the start information number display is switched from non-display to display in accordance with a predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the symbol display unit stops displaying the symbol), and the second control mode is changed to the second control mode. The control mode may be a mode in which the start information number display is continuously displayed while the symbol display unit performs the symbol variation display. The first control mode may be a mode in which the start information number display is continuously hidden.

  The symbol display section and the effect display section that displays the start information number may be common display means.

  Further, “the effect display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is configured so that the control state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300) is changed from the special game state (for example, the big hit game state) to the normal game state. (E.g., when the predetermined condition is satisfied at the first predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the first symbol variation display in the 1G series effect is started) after the control state is shifted to (for example, the non-big hit gaming state) A game table characterized by performing control for causing the effect display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) to execute a first specific effect display (for example, effect A). It may be.

  The first predetermined timing may be, for example, the timing at which the first symbol change display starts after the control state is shifted from the special gaming state to the normal gaming state. Moreover, it is the timing (for example, at the start of the 30th symbol variation display) when an effect (for example, a judge effect) that suggests the current game state performed in a situation where the current game state is concealed is executed. Also good. Furthermore, arbitrary timing may be sufficient.

  One or a plurality of times including a symbol variation display for notifying the specific success / failure determination result at the end, wherein a predetermined length is set as a period length in which the symbol variation display is performed a plurality of predetermined times (for example, the predetermined upper limit number). In performing an effect (for example, a 1G series effect) in which the length of time during which the specific symbol variation display is executed is the predetermined period, the first predetermined timing is determined from the one or more specific symbol variation displays. It may be a predetermined timing during the first symbol variation display (for example, the timing at which the first symbol variation display is started).

  In addition, “the normal gaming state (for example, non-big hit gaming state) is different from the first normal gaming state (for example, the special figure low-probability ordinary-low probability state) and the first normal gaming state. A normal gaming state (for example, a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state), and the control state transition means includes the special gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) and the second normal gaming state (for example, , Special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) and the first normal gaming state (for example, special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) in order of the control display (for example, first display After the control state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300) shifts the control state to the second normal gaming state (for example, the special figure high probability common figure high probability state), the sub control unit 400) In the first normal gaming state (for example, special figure low probability ordinary figure The second predetermined timing (for example, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) is transferred to the special figure high probability common figure low probability state before the control state is transferred to the probability state), and the first symbol variation display is started. Control that causes the first display effect (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) to execute the first specific effect display (for example, effect A) is performed, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied at the timing). Amusement stand. It may be.

  For example, the effect display control means may perform the predetermined timing (corresponding to the second predetermined timing) during the second number of times (for example, four times) of the symbol variation display in the ST mode. If the predetermined condition is satisfied, control for causing the effect display unit to execute the first specific effect display may be performed. In this case, the first normal gaming state is the probability non-variable state and the entry difficult state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the second normal gaming state is the probability variation. A state and the easy entry state (for example, a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) and the probability variation state and the entry difficult state (for example, a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state), the second predetermined The timing is the timing at which the state changes from the probability variation state and the easy entry state to the probability variation state and the entry difficult state.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix A)
Starting information deriving means for deriving starting information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting area;
Start information storage means capable of storing start information derived by the start information deriving means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Starting information acquisition means for acquiring starting information from the starting information storage means;
A determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquisition unit;
In a case where the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is a specific success / failure determination result, the first advantage and the advantage are from the first control state in which the advantage for the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means for shifting the control state to a second control state which is a different second advantage;
A symbol display means for performing symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure;
Prior to the determination of success / failure, the start information pre-reading means for pre-reading the start information stored in the start information storage means;
Corresponding based on the predetermined start information pre-read by the start information pre-reading means before the correct / incorrect determination based on the predetermined start information stored in the start information storage means is performed by the correct / incorrect determination means. A pre-determination unit that pre-determines whether or not the non-determination unit derives the specific determination result;
Based on the prior determination result by the prior determination unit, the advance determination notification is made for the advance determination notification whether the determination unit derives the specific determination result or not. Prior notice means to be done before,
A game machine equipped with
The advance notice means is executing a first advance notice for the predetermined start information, and a predetermined opportunity is established before execution of the symbol variation display based on the predetermined start information. The execution of the first advance notice is stopped based on the second predetermined advance notice different from the first advance notice for the same predetermined start information. A game table.

  The interest of the game can be improved by performing different prior notices for the same starting information. In addition, even if the first advance notice is canceled, the player can recognize which start information is expected. There are cases in which the interest of the game is improved by the advance notice.

(Appendix B)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first advance notice is executed so that the predetermined start information can be specified.

  Even if the first advance notice is canceled, the player can recognize which start information he / she expects, so the second advance notice is given rather than the first advance notice already made. There are cases in which the interest of the game is improved by performing the notification.

(Appendix C)
A game machine as set forth in appendices A and B,
A start hold number notifying means for notifying the number of start information stored in the start information storage means as a start hold number and performing one start hold display for one start information; In advance notice, the start hold display corresponding to the predetermined start information is changed to a special display mode different from the normal display mode, while the start display is changed to the special display mode based on the establishment of the predetermined trigger. A game table, wherein the display is returned to the normal display mode.

  Since the hold display can easily recognize the symbol variation display expected by the player, there are cases where the interest of the game is further improved by giving different prior notices to the same start information.

(Appendix D)
A gaming machine according to appendices A to C,
The gaming machine is configured such that the start timing of the second advance notice notification is executable at a timing different from the start timing of the first advance notice notice.

  In some cases, the interest of the game may be improved by changing the timing of the advance notice in addition to changing the form of the advance notice.

  For example, the hold change, which is the first advance notice, is the hold display timing, that is, the timing at which the game ball wins the start winning opening, but the second advance notice is for the start information already held. Since it is a notice, it is difficult to perform at the same timing as the timing of the first advance notice, and a variation of the advance notice can be given by giving the second advance notice at a different timing.

(Appendix E)
A gaming machine according to appendices A to D,
A gaming table, wherein the second advance notice is executable during the second control state based on the derivation of the specific determination result.

(Appendix F)
A gaming machine according to appendices A to E,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second prior notice notification is set to have a higher reliability for deriving the specific determination result than the first prior notice information.

  Not only does the advance notice change, but also the degree of expectation for the big hit increases, so that the player's expectation may be increased.

  Here, the advance notice means regulates execution of the first advance notice for the same predetermined starting information after stopping the execution of the first advance notice. It may be a gaming table.

  In addition, the advance notice means notifies the second advance notice after the supply of power to the game machine is resumed based on the fact that the power supply to the game machine is cut off during the execution of the first advance notice. A game table that is configured to be executable. It may be.

(Appendix 1)
In a gaming table capable of storing start information generated based on a game ball entering the start area,
A determination unit for acquiring the start information stored, and determining whether or not the determination is correct based on the acquired start information;
A pre-reading notice unit for executing a pre-reading notice for a notice of the result of the validity determination based on the start-up information pre-read before the start / fail judgment means acquires the starting information;
With
The prefetch notice means executes a first prefetch notice when the first prefetch notice condition is satisfied, and when a second prefetch notice condition different from the first prefetch notice condition is fulfilled, A gaming machine, wherein a second pre-reading notice is executed for the same notice object as the notice object of the first pre-reading notice in a mode different from the mode of the first pre-reading notice.

  The pre-reading notice mentioned here may be a notice that the result of the determination of whether or not to be notified is a specific determination result (for example, a win or a big win), and further, by changing the design. In the aspect provided with the symbol display means for performing the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination as to whether or not the object is determined, the target symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination as to whether or not the object is to be notified May be a pre-announcement before the start of (same below). Alternatively, it may be a prior notification that is started before the target symbol variation display is performed. In this case, the prior notification is continuously performed even after the target symbol variation display is started. (The same applies hereinafter).

(Appendix 2)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
Even if the second prefetching notice condition is satisfied after the first prefetching notice condition is satisfied, the prefetching notice unit is configured to execute the second prefetching notice condition before the first prefetch notice condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that the second pre-reading notice is executed even when a notice condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the game stand described in Appendix 1,
The pre-reading notice means may determine whether or not the result is correct even if the result of the determination based on the pre-read start information is a specific result of the determination, even if the result of the determination is not a specific result of the determination. A pre-reading notice that causes the player to expect that the result of the determination is the specific success / failure determination result is executed. ) Executes the second prefetching notice as a prefetching notice higher than the first prefetching notice.

(Appendix 3)
In the game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
If the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied after the first prefetch notice is started, the prefetch notice means stops the first prefetch notice, and then the second prefetch notice. A game table characterized by starting a notice.

(Appendix 4)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
The prefetch notice unit executes the second prefetch notice only when the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied only when the result of the judgment based on the pre-read start information is a specific result. The first prefetch notice condition is satisfied even if the result of the determination based on the pre-read start information is a specific determination result or the determination result is different from the specific determination result. In this case, the first prefetch notice may be executed.

(Appendix 5)
The start area includes a first start area and a second start area different from the first start area;
A start hold display means capable of performing start hold display in a predetermined display mode for each of the stored start information,
The start hold display means is
Between the first control state in which the advantage for the player is the first advantage and the second control state in which the second advantage is different from the first advantage It is possible to perform the start hold display in different display modes,
The predetermined display mode is also different between start information generated based on entering the first start area and start information generated based on entering the second start area. The start hold display can be performed,
The first pre-reading notice can also be performed by displaying the start hold display in a first display mode different from the predetermined display mode,
The game stand, wherein the second prefetch notice can be executed by displaying the start hold display in a second display mode different from the predetermined display mode.

  The second starting area is a variable starting area in which the size of the winning opening can be changed between a large size in which a game ball can be won and a small size in which a game ball cannot be won. Also good.

A variable winning means capable of changing the state between a first state in which a winning of a game ball is difficult and a second state in which a winning of a game ball is easier than the first state;
In a case where the result of the determination of success / failure is a specific result of determination of success / failure, the variable winning means is between the first state and the second state from the normal gaming state in which the variable winning means maintains the first state. The game state transition means for shifting the control state to the special game state in which the state change is repeated may be provided.

  Here, the variable winning means is a winning means (for example, a variable winning opening 234) that is opened after the symbol display means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the specific success / failure determination (big bonus with special symbol probability variation). In other words, when the success / failure determination means derives the specific success / failure determination result based on the start information generated based on the fact that the vehicle has entered the second start area, a game ball The winning means may change the size of the entrance from the first variable state where entry is difficult to the second variable state where the game ball is easy to enter.

(Appendix 6)
In a gaming table capable of storing start information generated based on a game ball entering the start area,
A determination unit for acquiring the start information stored, and determining whether or not the determination is correct based on the acquired start information;
A pre-reading notice unit for executing a pre-reading notice for a notice of the result of the validity determination based on the start-up information pre-read before the start / fail judgment means acquires the starting information;
With
The prefetch notice means executes a first prefetch notice when the first prefetch notice condition is satisfied, and when a second prefetch notice condition different from the first prefetch notice condition is fulfilled, A game machine characterized in that a second prefetch notice is executed for a notice object different from the notice object of the first prefetch notice in a manner different from the aspect of the first prefetch notice.

  Here, it may be an aspect provided with a symbol display means for performing symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure after performing symbol variation.

(Appendix 7)
In the game stand described in Appendix 6,
If the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied after the first prefetch notice is started, the prefetch notice means stops the first prefetch notice, and then the second prefetch notice. A game table characterized by starting a notice.

(Appendix 8)
In the game stand described in appendix 6 or 7,
The prefetching notice means can execute a plurality of types of prefetching notices having different types, and the second prefetching notice includes a prefetching notice of the same type as the first prefetching notice type but having a different aspect. A game machine characterized by being executed.

(Appendix 9)
In the game stand according to any one of appendix 6 to appendix 8,
When the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied, the prefetch notice means has one of the first prefetch notice, the mode, and the type for the same notice object as the notice object of the first prefetch notice. Or a game stand characterized in that both perform different third look-ahead notices.

(Appendix 10)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 6 to 9,
The prefetch notice means sets the transition of the game state from one of the first game state and the second game state different from the first game state to the second prefetch notice condition. A game stand for executing the second pre-reading notice.

(Appendix 11)
In a gaming table capable of storing start information generated based on a game ball entering the start area,
A determination unit for acquiring the start information stored, and determining whether or not the determination is correct based on the acquired start information;
Symbol display means for performing symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation;
Start hold display means capable of performing start hold display in a predetermined display mode for each of the stored start information;
When the predetermined notice condition is satisfied, the notice about the result of the judgment of the subject of the notice is started before the execution of the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol form corresponding to the result of the judgment of the subject of the notice. Notice means,
With
The notice means is the same notice object as the notice object of the first notice or the notice object of the first notice after the first notice is started and after a specific notice condition is established. The second notice can be started for different notice objects, and
The start hold display means also performs the first notice by displaying the start hold display in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, and also serving as the notification unit. To do,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notice means executes a notice of a notice type different from the notice type using the start hold display as the second notice.

(Appendix 12)
In the game stand described in Appendix 11,
First starting information storage means for storing first starting information generated based on the game ball entering the first starting area;
Second starting information storage means for storing second starting information generated based on the game ball entering the second starting area;
With
The start hold display means starts the first notice based on the first start information when the first notice condition is satisfied, and when the second notice condition is fulfilled, Starting the first notice based on the second starting information,
The gaming machine characterized in that the notice means can start the second notice on the basis of at least one of the first start information and the second start information.

(Appendix 13)
In the game stand described in appendix 12,
The start hold display means is capable of executing one or more first notices by displaying one or more start hold displays in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode, and In the state where the first notice is started, when the specific notice condition is satisfied, at least one of the first notices that can be started can be canceled. A game stand characterized by being.

(Appendix 14)
In the game stand described in Appendix 13,
The notice means determines whether the result of the success / failure determination is the result of the determination of whether or not the result of the advance notice is a specific result of the determination, even if the result of the determination is not a specific result of the determination. A notice is made to cause the player to expect that the result is the specific determination result,
The reliability (expectation) that the result of the determination of whether or not the target of the advance notice is the specific result of the success or failure is the second notice based on the first notice based on the first start information and the second start information. A game table that is different from the previous notice.

(Appendix 15)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 11 to 13,
The game table characterized in that the notice means is capable of starting the second notice for the same notice object as the notice object of the first notice.

  In addition, even if it is a structural requirement contained only in description of embodiment and the additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative symbol display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 230 1st special figure start port 232 2nd special view start port 2321 Blade member 234 Variable prize opening 2341 Door member 300 Main control part 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 Second sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows .
Start information storage means capable of storing start information each time a predetermined storage condition is satisfied;
When there is established a predetermined spruce determination conditions, wherein a possible least perform the propriety determination based on the starting information, when there is established a predetermined hold condition, which can hold the execution of the relevant determination Means for determining whether or not it is correct;
When there is established a predetermined symbol variation condition, after the symbol variation, and the propriety determination of response to results of at least viable symbol display means symbol variation display stops displaying the symbol mode,
When there is established a predetermined notice condition, prior to the execution of the symbol variation display the advisability symbol aspect the execution corresponding to the result of spruce determination based on the starting information pending determination is stopped and displayed, warning A notice means capable of at least initiating a notice about the result of the subject's success / failure determination;
A game machine equipped with
The predetermined notice condition includes a specific notice condition,
The notice means, even after having started the first notice, and the after had established a particular notice conditions, of the first notice announcement target the same notice subject or said first notice and The second notice can be started for a different notice object from the notice object,
The first notice is composed of an aspect capable of specifying a hold for starting information on which execution of the success / failure determination for deriving a result of the success / failure determination subject to the advance notice of the first notice is suspended,
The second notice is composed of an aspect in which it is not possible to specify a hold for starting information for which the execution of the validity determination for deriving the result of the validity determination to be a notice of the second notice is suspended .
It is characterized by that.

Claims (5)

Start information storage means capable of storing start information each time a predetermined storage condition is satisfied;
If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute at least the determination on the basis of the start-up information. Means,
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is established, after performing symbol variation, a symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination;
If the predetermined notice condition is satisfied, the notice object is displayed prior to the execution of the symbol variation display in which the symbol form corresponding to the result of the decision on the basis of the start information on which the execution of the decision on validity is suspended is stopped and displayed. A notice means capable of at least initiating a notice of the result of the determination of whether or not
A game machine equipped with
The predetermined notice condition includes a specific notice condition,
The notice means is the same notice object as the notice object of the first notice or the notice object of the first notice after the start of the first notice and after the specific notice condition is established. The second notice can be started for different notice objects, and
The first notice is composed of an aspect capable of specifying a hold for starting information on which execution of the success / failure determination for deriving a result of the success / failure determination subject to the advance notice of the first notice is suspended,
The second notice is composed of an aspect in which it is impossible to specify the hold for the start information for which the execution of the right / no-go determination for deriving the result of the right / no-go determination to be the target of the second notice is suspended. A game table. In the game stand of Claim 1,
The starting information storage means is capable of storing at least first starting information and second starting information different from the first starting information,
The notice means can start the first notice based on the first start information, and can start the first notice based on the second start information.
The gaming machine characterized in that the notice means can start the second notice on the basis of at least one of the first start information and the second start information. In the game stand of Claim 2,
When the specific notice condition is satisfied in a state where one or a plurality of the first notices are started, the notice means is at least one of the one or a plurality of the first notices started. One of the game tables characterized in that the first notice can be canceled. In the game stand of Claim 3,
The first notice started based on the first start information is composed of a first aspect,
The first notice that is started based on the second start information comprises a second aspect different from the first aspect,
The first notice that is started based on the first start information corresponds to the specific success / failure determination result in the symbol variation in which the symbol form corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not to be the notice is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the probability that the symbol pattern to be displayed is stopped and displayed is different from the first notice that is started based on the second start information. In the game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The game table characterized in that the notice means is capable of starting the second notice for the same notice object as the notice object of the first notice.